JP7099720B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that a reserved image corresponding to the number of reserved images stored in a storage unit is displayed in a reserved image display area.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-140643

However, in a gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in the production of the gaming in terms of improving the interest of the gaming.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The game machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 100) has a main control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control unit 200) and a command transmitted from the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200). The main control means (for example, the game control unit 200) includes an effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) that controls the corresponding effect, and whether or not the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200) performs a special game based on the establishment of the start condition. A determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not the determination is made, a storage means for storing determination information based on the determination as a hold storage (for example, RAM 203), and a variable display of the special symbol according to the result of the determination. The staging control means (for example, the staging control unit 300) has a variation display means (for example, a special symbol variation control unit 233) for causing and then stopping and displaying, and the staging control means (for example, the staging control unit 300) displays a hold display in response to an increase in the hold storage. It is possible to additionally display and move and display the hold display according to the decrease in the hold memory, and the variation effect of changing the specific symbol and then stopping the display along with the change display and the stop display of the special symbol. Is possible, and along with the variation display and stop display of the special symbol, the special symbol is cycle-displayed in the first cycle and then stopped, and when a specific command related to the variation effect is received , the special symbol of the special symbol is displayed. After the start of the cycle display, the movement display of the hold display can be started, and after the start of the movement display, the hold display can be operated and displayed in the second cycle, and the first cycle and the said The time is different from the second cycle, and the hold display includes a first hold display and a second hold display that can be displayed after the display of the first hold display, and the first hold display and the second hold display. When the hold display is displayed, the specific command related to the specific variation effect is received, and the variation effect next to the specific variation effect is displayed without receiving the specific command related to the specific variation effect. It is a gaming machine capable of different modes of movement display by the second hold display depending on the case where the specific command is received, and the first hold display is displayed in the display area of the hold display. When there is a first display area to be displayed and a second display area in which the second hold display is displayed, and the hold display is displayed in the first display area and the second display area, the hold display is displayed. When the specific command related to the next variation effect is received without receiving the specific command related to the variation effect, the hold display in the second display area is hidden and the front is displayed. It is possible to execute the movement display of the hold display in the first display area .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are exemplified in the description of the present invention, and the above-mentioned reference numerals do not reduce the present invention.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest in the production using the production image or the like.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the lower left of the gaming board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and (c) is arranged at the lower left of the gaming board. It is an enlarged view which shows an example of the sub-information display. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the image / acoustic control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the basic processing by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the process at the time of power-off by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the start port switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a gate switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the stopped processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of ordinary symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the random number used in this embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot symbol random number, (c). Is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit random number. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a block diagram explaining the configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). Is. It is a block diagram explaining the configuration example of the RAM of the staging control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved storage area, and (b) is a block showing each configuration of the storage unit shown in (a). It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the pre-determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of a staging control unit, (a) is a figure which shows the main process, (b) is a figure which shows interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a command reception process. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the effect button processing. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources while changing a setting. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. It is a variation effect pattern table for a big hit in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. A variable effect pattern table for small hits and misses in a low-probability time-saving non-game state is shown. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is explanatory drawing of each effect in the variation effect example 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of each effect in the variation effect example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one mode of the effect performed by the effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol display. It is a figure which shows the display effect example for each effect mode. It is a figure which shows the display effect example of the hold number. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect starts from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 76. It is a timing chart when a start prize is won during a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 79. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect is executed continuously. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 81. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 81. It is a timing chart when the fluctuation effect is started without receiving the stop command normally. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 84. It is a timing chart when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a timing chart when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. It is a timing chart when the loss normal reach fluctuation production ends and the customer waits. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 91. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 91. It is a timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is finished. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 94. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 94. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 97. It is a timing chart when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 100. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 100. It is a figure which shows the production example at various timings of FIG. 100. It is a timing chart when the start command could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 104. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 104. It is a timing chart when the power-on designation command is received while the menu image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the effect example at various timings of FIG. 107. It is a figure which shows the symbol variation action production example of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol variation action production example of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol variation action production example of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol variation action production example of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol variation action production example of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol variation action production example of a decorative symbol. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when the command cannot be received and the chance eye light emission effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when the command cannot be received and the reach light emission effect. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when the command cannot be received and the execution timing between the light emitting effect using the decorative symbol.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[First Embodiment]
[Basic configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a gaming ball launched by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 on which a gaming ball is launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the gaming board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member 112 on the front surface, and a rail member 112 forming a passage through which the game ball launched from below rises toward the upper position of the game area 111. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the region 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for staging is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 is provided with a display screen by a liquid crystal display or the like, and as the game progresses by the player, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol change result) can be displayed. It displays an effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using the hold display described later.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 110, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided. The movable accessory 115 operates on the game board 110 to perform various effects, and the board lamp 116 emits light to perform various effects.

In the game area 111, a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls are arranged. Further, in the game area 111, various accessories related to winning a prize or a lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, the game area 111 is provided with an discharge port 117 that discharges a game ball launched into the game area 111 that has not won a prize in the winning port to the outside of the game area 111. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an out-ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 3 to be described later) that detects an out-ball composed of a game ball flowing into the discharge port 117.

In the present embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, the first starting port 121 and the second starting opening 122 where the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) starts when the game ball wins, and the second starting port 122 when the game ball passes are normal. A starting gate (hereinafter, simply referred to as a gate) 124 at which a symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is started is arranged on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the gate 124 on the left side is described as 124L, and the gate 124 on the right side is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to here refer to winning openings that trigger the operation of the predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) for detecting the passage of a game ball at the time of winning a prize. Has been done. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the operation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades opens and closes by an electric solenoid and lights up. In the electric tulip 123, when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, while when the wings are opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball moves to the second starting port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. Then, when the electric tulip 123 wins the ordinary symbol lottery, the blades open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a low-probability state in which the winning probability is low and a high-probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Then, it is controlled to either a low probability state or a high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a state in which there is little chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 and a state in which there is more chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 than in a state without electric support. have. Then, under predetermined conditions such as, for example, triggered by the number of lottery of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, the state is controlled to be either an electric support state or an electric support state. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a gaming state controlled by the combination.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is long and a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than the time-saving non-state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, the electric support state and the time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric support non-state and the time saving non-state are simply referred to as the time saving non-state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as other characters related to winning or lottery, a large winning opening 125 as a special electric character that opens according to the result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery even if the game ball wins are performed. A normal winning opening 126 and a non-normal winning opening 126 are arranged on the game board 110. The large winning opening 125 is provided with a large winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the large winning opening 125. In the following description, the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening door 125D may be described as the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 125 for convenience.
In the present embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery result and the number of holdings is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the second starting opening and the large winning opening 125 provided with the electric tulip 123 are arranged in the right region of the gaming region 111. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when trying to win a prize in the second starting opening 122 or the large winning opening 125, the gaming ball is made to flow down to the right area of the gaming area 111. ..

Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board for determining the winning of a special symbol, an effect control board for comprehensively controlling the effect, an image control board for controlling the image and sound effect, various lamps, and the like. Various boards (not shown) such as a lamp control board that controls the effect of the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs it to various boards or the like is arranged.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 in the clockwise direction, the frame member 150 causes the game balls to be hit at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 per minute) with a striking force according to the operation angle. It is equipped with a launcher (not shown) that launches electrically with. Further, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launcher one by one at a timing linked to an operation by the player's lever 152, and a game ball supplied by the supply device to the launcher. It is equipped with a plate 153 for temporary storage. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate 153.
In the present embodiment, the plate 153 is configured by integrating the upper and lower plates, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated can also be considered. Further, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

Further, the frame member 150 has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball even when the player is in contact with the handle 151 of the launcher, and the game ball accumulated in the plate 153. It is equipped with a take-out button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light such as a pattern due to lighting / blinking and a difference in light emission color. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example that enables an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the lower left of the gaming board 110. FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and FIG. 2C is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the lower left of the gaming board.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used to win the first special symbol display 221 and the second starting port 122, which operate in response to the winning of the first starting port 121. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the second starting port 122. As will be described in detail in the second embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 have a plurality of cycle fluctuations (cycle displays) in which the change in the display mode is one cycle (= 256 ms). It is repeated, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the ordinary symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 operates in response to the hold on the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol hold display 218 and the second special symbol display 222. 2 The special symbol hold indicator 219 and the normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operate in response to the hold on the normal symbol display 223 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting mode thereof. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be described. If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning prize is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning. Therefore, the later winnings are stored up to the specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. It is put on hold.
The same processing as for the special symbol is performed for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold has been made and the number of holds (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220.

Further, the display 130 includes a state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status display 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights up to indicate whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

Further, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is operated in the big hit game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 includes a status confirmation display 226. The status confirmation display 226 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The lighting of the LED is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 226 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. .. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is recognized which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, in the setting change mode, the status confirmation display 226 may be lit and displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, the status confirmation display 226 may be blinked and vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 226 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222, the first special symbol hold display 218, the second special symbol hold display 219, and the round number display are displayed. Since the 225, the status indicator 224, and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an input device for the player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 which is adjacent to the effect button 161 and is composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape. Is arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect of accepting an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates the effect key 162 composed of four keys arranged in a cross shape to instruct one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114, and presses the effect button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting an instructed image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever and a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect and the like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, and the sub second hold display 84 are inside the game area 111. A sub-information display 80 including a sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal map hold display 86, and a sub right-handed display 87 is provided.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit. The sub information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, such as the status confirmation display 226.

The sub first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display, and the sub second variable display 82 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the second special symbol is variable. It is for displaying (notifying) whether or not it is inside, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (lights up for 0.5 seconds → turns off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. do. In other words, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 repeatedly perform cycle display in which one blinking is one cycle (= 1 second), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. Light.

The sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be used to notify the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this case, it is advisable to turn on the LED in the case of a big hit and turn off the LED in the case of a loss.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information (first hold number) described later, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information described later (the number of second hold information). It is for displaying the second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of holds is "4".

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (the number of normal figure hold), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for urging the game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 111 (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED is turned on during the big hit state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED is turned off in other game states.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image / acoustic control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a main control means, which determines whether or not a special symbol has been won. Further, as sub-control means, an effect control unit 300 that comprehensively controls the effect and a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of payout balls are provided.

[Configuration / function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of a special symbol, a ROM 202 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 201, and a working memory of the CPU 201. RAM 203 and

The game control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving no state, or a time-saving state. As a result, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are a high-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a low-probability state and a time-saving state, and a high-probability state and a time-saving non-state. It is one of a low-probability time-saving no-game state, a low-probability state, and a low-probability time-saving no-game state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high-probability state and the low-probability state, and switches between the time-saving non-state and the time-saving state based on a predetermined condition. Further, the game control unit 200 controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and the like. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122. Then, a special game such as a big hit game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 performs a predetermined number of rounds in which the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, is maintained in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). Control to repeat only. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening / closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 opens.

Further, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
Further, the game control unit 200 holds the game ball when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol change, or the game ball passes through the gate 124 during the normal symbol change. Set the hold that occurs as a result.
Further, the game control unit 200 accompanies game control such as determination results of special symbol lottery and normal symbol lottery, change information of high-probability state and low-probability state, change information of time-saving non-state and time-saving state, hold setting information, and the like. Information is sent to the staging control unit 300 by a command described later.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the large winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, the game control unit 200 hits one game ball according to the place where the game ball wins. An instruction is given to the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, three prize balls, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 122, four prize balls, and if a game ball wins in the large winning opening 125, 13 prizes. When a game ball wins a ball or a normal winning opening 126, an instruction command is sent to the payout control unit 330 so that 10 prize balls are paid out respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball linked to the game ball.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As a detection means, the game control unit 200 includes a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW) 211) that detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121. , To the second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122, the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213 for opening / closing the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW) 214) for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected to the gate detection unit (SW) 214.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. The large winning opening door opening / closing part 216 that sets the closed state and the protruding inclined open state, and the normal winning opening detection unit (ordinary winning opening switch (SW) 217) that detects the winning of the game ball to the ordinary winning opening 126. , Are connected.

Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unchanged holdings that have won a prize in the first starting port 121 during the change of the special symbol, and a second special symbol hold indicator 218 during the change of the special symbol. The second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays the number of unchanged items that have been won in the starting port 122, and the normal symbol hold indicator that displays the number of unchanged items that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal symbol is changing. 220 and are connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol display 221 that displays the result of the special symbol variation display and the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 121, and the second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to 122, and the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display that displays the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. The device 223 and the state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the large winning port switch 215, and the normal winning port switch 217 are sent to the game control unit 200. Further, the control signals from the game control unit 200 are the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213, the grand prize opening door opening / closing unit 216, the first special symbol holding indicator 218, the second special symbol holding indicator 219, and the normal symbol holding indicator 220. , 1st special symbol display 221 and 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223 and status display 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls described above.

Further, on the surface side of the game control board, a signal for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 or updating the set value (probability of being determined to be a big hit) at the stage of the advantage of the game is input. RAM clear switch 228, setting key switch 229 for inputting signals for shifting to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key, performance information and settings that enable the actual performance of the game machine to be grasped. An information display 230 for displaying a value, other electronic components, and the like are mounted.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 39 described later) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left, and set by the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information is configured (see FIG. 38). When displaying the set value, static lighting is performed, and when displaying performance information, dynamic lighting is performed.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for a board that transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out, information indicating the state of the game control unit 200, etc. acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board. do.

[Configuration / function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling payout balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 331, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And have.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize (first starting port 121 or the like). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so that the number of prize balls specified in the command is paid out. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the storage unit of the game ball.

Further, the payout control unit 330 includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). It detects whether or not the ball presence detection unit 336 that detects the presence or absence of storage of the ball and the plate 153 that holds the game ball used when the player plays the game and the paid out prize ball are in a full tank state. The full tank detection unit 337 is connected to the full tank detection unit 337. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various information to the host computer installed in the hall. Then, the payout control unit 330 may, for example, provide information on the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of actually paid out prize balls detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the external information terminal board 340 for the frame. Further, the same information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Structure / function of staging control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 301, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and a date and time. It is equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) 304, which measures the data.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, the determination result of whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not and the fluctuation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the effect content may be set according to the operation input by receiving the operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161 and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, and the change information of the time reduction non-state and the time reduction state received from the game control unit 200.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sends a command instructing the execution of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.

Further, the effect control unit 300 is connected to an image / sound control unit 310 that controls an effect using images and sound, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls an effect using various lamps and movable accessories 115. Has been done.

[Configuration / function of image / acoustic control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image / sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling an image expressing the effect content and sound, a program executed by the CPU 311 and various data. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory of the CPU 311 and the like, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and a SNDROM 316.

Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 has a symbol image and a background image to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, a character for displaying a notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data such as items are stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various acoustic data such as music and voice that are synchronized with the image data or output from the speaker 156 independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles.
The CPU 311 analyzes animation patterns, creates a display list summarizing commands related to drawing, and sends the display list to VDP314 based on the hold number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300. conduct.

The VDP 314 reads out the image data and the acoustic data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Further, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display, etc. using the read image data, and voice processing using the read acoustic data. .. Then, the VDP 314 controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 by the image data that has been drawn. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 by the sound processed sound data.
In the present embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform voice processing in addition to the drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to voice processing may be separately provided.

[Configuration / function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program and various data executed by the CPU 321. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory of the CPU 321 and the like.
Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable accessory 115.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 contains lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern) of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores the operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 by the read operation pattern data.

In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the staging control unit 300, the image / sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board as a sub-board, the effect control board as a sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol fluctuation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units for executing various lottery processes. , Ordinary symbol variation control unit 236, and.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with a special symbol variation.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a large winning opening motion control unit 237, an electric tulip motion control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units for executing data processing related to motion control of various accessories and prize balls. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, the numerical value in a predetermined range is set for each type of random number. One numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
Further, in the case of the random value used for the ordinary symbol lottery, specifically, one numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from the numerical values in a predetermined range on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ). The acquired random number value is usually used for determination by the symbol determination unit 232. As the random numbers used in the ordinary symbol lottery, in addition to the hit random numbers indicating whether or not they are hits, symbol random numbers indicating the types of hits, variable pattern random numbers, and the like may be set.
When the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the lottery result.

At the start of the change of the special symbol, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. "Type" and "whether it is a small hit or a miss when the big hit is not won" are determined. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. Based on the acquired random number value, the unit 234 determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The above-mentioned special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) refers to processing by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "big hit" is divided into a plurality of types according to the game state generated after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by the combination of the time-saving no state or the time-saving state, and the high-probability state or the low-probability state. That is, as the types of jackpots based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot that becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot in the high-probability time-saving gaming state) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Big hit (hereinafter, big hit in low probability time saving game state), big hit in high probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, big hit in high probability time saving no game state), big hit in low probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, low) There is a possibility of a jackpot in a non-game state with a short probability. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of the special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

Further, the "big hit" may be divided into a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is short and the payout of the game balls can hardly be expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in "long hit", a round in which the open state of the large winning opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). Is done. Further, in the "short hit", a round in which the large winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, when the big hit is not won, the "small hit" is a small hit game in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Will be done. When the small hit is won, the game state before the small hit is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, the "small hit" is a kind of "missing", and none of the above-mentioned gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 can perform a reach effect in the determination result of whether or not to perform the jackpot game and the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). ) Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the judgment result and the like. Then, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235. Details of the operations of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, the "reach" is an effect for making the player expect a big hit in the decorative design described later.

The ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "win or not" by using a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. That is, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the ordinary symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Further, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of hit" when the determination result is a hit. The ordinary symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the ordinary symbol determination unit 232.
The normal symbol variation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip motion control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol lottery determines "hit" by the normal symbol determination unit 232, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 122. Generate a state that makes it easy to win a prize. Further, when it is determined to be "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later. For example, there are an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol lottery determines "big hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 has a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the winning jackpot as a big hit game. Controls the opening operation of 125. Further, when the special symbol lottery determines "small hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the large winning opening 125 as a small hit game for a specified time and a specified number of times. ..
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets a command for managing the number of prizes for various prizes related to prizes and lottery, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of gaming machines]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes and sets various devices as a basic process at startup. Then, after performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Further, when the power is cut off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power cut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is referred to as “S”) 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the backup flag related to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is cut off is normal (S604).
When the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes the return process (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets sub-control means such as the staging control unit 300 when returning from the state in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is in a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state and a time-saving non-state). A command for setting a sub-control means is output to the staging control unit 300 so as to reflect any one of the above. Further, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As a process, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control means) (S608). The setting of the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed or the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for the game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the interrupt enable (S610), interrupt disable (S611), symbol random number control process (S612), initial value random number update process (S613), and power cutoff flag are ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, the interrupt enable (S610) and the interrupt disable (S611) are provided to enable the execution of the interrupt process during the execution of the loop process (S610 to S614). In the present embodiment, this interrupt process executes the main control process in the game control. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, when the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interruption together with loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (process at the time of power cutoff).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cutoff process by the game control unit 200.
In the power cutoff process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of gaming machines]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub control means, to control the effect, and gives the payout control unit 330 a prize ball. Instruct to control the payout of.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is enabled in the loop process shown in FIG. 6 (see S610), the main control is performed as the interrupt process. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, random number update process, switch process, symbol process, electric accessory process, prize ball process, and output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 to update the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the states of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in FIG. 3, and the switch is turned on. If it becomes, the process for the special symbol lottery is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the pre-determination process is performed in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute the process for pre-judgment.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and when the switch is turned on, it is for a normal symbol lottery. Execute the process.
The details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), a special symbol processing and a normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation. do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and the processing associated with the normal symbol change.
The detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a large winning opening processing and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the special winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip motion control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for managing the number of prizes and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and is stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805 and is stored (set) in the storage area of the control command provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 examines the storage area of each control command of the RAM 203 in order, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, the control command is generated by the processing of S802 to S805). B), the control command is read out and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the output process is performed at the end of a series of main control processes. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. Then, after these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the last command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

[Modification example of basic operation of gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular time intervals, and the specific realization means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may be returned to the main control process at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into a series of operations of the basic process, if an interrupt is generated at regular time intervals and an interrupt is generated, as in the operation described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated in the basic process.

When outputting the command generated in the basic processing, as a general rule, each time the command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is a special process such as an initial operation performed only when the power is turned on, unlike the main control process related to the progress of the game. In addition, since the processing procedure of the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated command is promptly output so that there is no omission in the output processing. It is a process. In addition, in response to a specific processing request, such as when commands are continuously generated by multiple related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and output collectively. May be.

[Random number update processing by the game control unit]
The random number value as the determination information used for various lottery in the game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by the counter, and the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 starts from a predetermined initial value. One is added each time it is done. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired in the start port switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 16). To. The counter of this random number value is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20A described later). , Returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and the information of the initial value. Therefore, after returning to the basic process shown in FIG. 6 from the main control process, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process among the switch processes shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start port switch process, a process for winning a prize at the first start port 121 and a process for winning a prize at the second start port 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned on (S901). When the first start port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the pending number U1 of the unvariable portion in the winning of the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit value (S902). .. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. When the holding number U1 has reached the upper limit value (No in S902), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the first starting port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the determination by the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). .. Here, since the prize is won in the first starting port 121, a random number value for a special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value. The random value here includes a jackpot random value that determines a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss, and the type of jackpot (time saving state or time saving no state after the end of the big hit game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short). The symbol random value (big hit symbol random value) that determines the hit), the fluctuation pattern random value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described later when the value is lost. Includes reach random values, etc. that determine whether or not.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S904). In the pre-judgment process, a random number is generated by a special symbol process for a winning ball (reserved ball) whose random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but has not yet been determined by the special symbol process described later. It is a process of determining the random number before the determination (predetermination).

Then, the staging control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines the random number by the special symbol processing based on the determination result (preliminary determination result) of the random number determined by the prior determination processing, and the determination result is notified. Before that, a notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed. In this advance notice effect, for example, the image display unit responds to the generation of a winning ball (reserved ball) in which a random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but the random number has not yet been determined by special symbol processing. It is performed by using the hold display effect (described later) displayed on 114. By the advance notice effect based on this advance determination, the player is suggested to the player the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing with respect to the reserved ball corresponding to the advance determination related to the advance notice effect. As a result, the player can play the game while having an expectation for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice production based on the preliminary judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the staging control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the process for winning the prize at the first start port 121. ..

Next, processing for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). When the second start port switch 212 is turned on, the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the unchanged number of reservations U2 in the winning of the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909). ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. When the holding number U2 has reached the upper limit value (No in S909), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the second starting port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery due to the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). .. Here, since the prize is won in the second starting port 122, the random number values for the special symbol lottery (big hit random value, big hit symbol random value, reach random value, variable pattern random value, etc.) are acquired in the same manner as in S903 above. To. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S911). The content of this pre-determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the staging control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the process for winning the prize at the second start port 122. ..

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch processing when the game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 is turned on (S1001). When the gate switch 214 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the unchanged hold number G is less than the upper limit value (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. When the holding number G has reached the upper limit value (No in S1002), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so the gate switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery due to the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). .. Here, since the prize is won at the gate 124, a random value (such as a winning random value) for a normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the hold number G (S1004).
After the value of the hold number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number G increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number G by S1004 (S1005). The process for winning a prize at the gate 124 is terminated.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON in the setting of the flag set in the RAM 203 (hereinafter, flag setting) (hereinafter, the flag setting). S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is undergoing special symbol variation (S1102). When the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing related to the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unchanged portion of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. ..

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the hold number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the holding number U2 = 0 (No in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 then determines whether the holding number U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the hold number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U1 (S1106). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U1 = 0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the special symbol, so that the special symbol change is not started and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. Is executed to end the process (S1116).
In this embodiment, the process related to the number of pending U2s related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is prioritized. That is, when the hold number U2 is 1 or more, the process related to the hold number U2 is performed, and when the hold number U2 = 0, the process related to the hold number U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won, the control may be such that the reserved numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in the order of winning.

After subtracting the hold number U1 or the hold number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 to be described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by another routine (S1108, S1109). Although the details will be described later, the setting information for the change of the special symbol (big hit symbol, game) which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) are determined. It should be noted that these information are included in the fluctuation start command sent to the staging control unit 300.

After that, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The change of the special symbol is started (S1110). Then, a variation start command including setting information (big hit symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The fluctuation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the staging control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined in S1102 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S1102), or after the change start command is set in S1111, the special symbol change control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, so that the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first determines the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1113). A variable stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the stopped processing of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the staging control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not it is a jackpot or a small hit (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a jackpot or a small hit is determined is whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the value set as the winning value of the jackpot or the value set as the winning value of the small hit. It is determined by determining whether or not (see FIG. 20 (a)).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (big hit in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, jackpot in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by which of the values preset for each type of jackpot matches the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 (FIG. 20 (Fig. 20). b) See).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol (big hit symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a symbol indicating that it is a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in RAM 203 (S1206).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses the symbol indicating that the lottery has been missed (hereinafter referred to as the missed symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the determination result of S1202 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won in this special symbol lottery (S1302). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 reads the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, when there is no big hit (No in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 then determines a random number value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for the player to expect a big hit. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches the preset value (see FIG. 20 (c)). ..
When the reach effect is performed as a result of the determination using the random value (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Further, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for removal from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number. It is a table associated with.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203, and selects a variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time-saving state or a time-saving state, and a high-probability state or a low-probability state), and the result of a special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit is made). , If there is no big hit, whether or not to perform reach effect), etc., the reference variation pattern table is different, so the determined variation pattern is different.

After that, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The fluctuation pattern setting information set in S1309 is included in the fluctuation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the staging control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The details of the fluctuation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stop by the game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped processing (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopped processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. (S1403). Then, if the number of lottery times J = 0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned off (S1404). The operation of turning on the time reduction flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), after turning off the time saving flag in S1404, or when the value of the lottery number J after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then the game control The unit 200 checks whether or not the flag indicating the high probability state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). If both the high-probability flag and the previous time-saving flag are ON, it is in the high-probability time-saving game state, and if the high-probability flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, it is in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) X in the high probability state (S1406), and has the lottery number X become 0? Check whether or not (S1407). Then, if the number of lottery times X = 0 (Yes in S1407), the high accuracy flag is turned off (S1408). The operation of turning on the high accuracy flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the high accuracy flag is OFF (No in S1405), after the high accuracy flag is turned OFF in S1408, or when the value of the lottery count X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not a big hit has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1409). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 then determines the type of the big hit (S1410). Here, as an example of determining the type of jackpot, whether or not it is a long hit is determined.

Here, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit can be made based on the determination result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20 (b) described later is set, it is Yes in S1409. If the missing symbol or the small hit symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (long hit gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a long hit. It should be noted that here, there is no distinction between a high-probability state and a low-probability state in the long hit. Whether the state becomes a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the type of big hit is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (short hit gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a short hit. As in the case of long hits, short hits do not distinguish between high-probability states and low-probability states.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high accuracy flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery times J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the opening command in the RAM 203 (S1418) for performing the effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300, and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is transmitted to the staging control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stopped processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts the small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the small hit gaming state. In the small hit game, as described above, the large winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

When the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process ends as it is (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the staging control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The customer waiting flag is set in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in effect and the normal symbol is stopped. Therefore, the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation (S1602). When the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1602), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the pending number G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). When the number of holds G = 0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number G (S1604). Then, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the ordinary symbol lottery this time, and determines whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not a winner is won is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table or the like shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as the setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a missed symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This fluctuation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting by S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Will be done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts the normal symbol fluctuation in the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2A and 3 based on the setting content of S1607 (S1608). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol. By making a determination, the fluctuation time is set.

After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined in S1602 that the normal symbol is changing (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1609). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608 has reached the fluctuation time set in S1607. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time ends (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is a winning (S1611). If it is a win (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is missed (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large winning opening processing in the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big prize opening process, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the jackpot 125, so the jackpot processing is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the jackpot motion control unit 237 then opens the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the motion control at the time of the jackpot started in the stopped processing (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1702).

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1702), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the time (opening time) for which the preset opening operation should be performed has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the large winning opening 125 is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0). (S1705), the value of the number of operating rounds R of the large winning opening 125 is added by 1 from the current value (S1706), and the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the large winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (the number of operation rounds) to be operated by the operation pattern are set. As an example of the case where the big winning opening 125 operates, there are a case where it is a big hit of a long hit or a short hit and a case where it is a small hit in a special symbol lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set variously according to the types of these hits. In the big hit game, it is stipulated that the big winning opening 125 is continuously operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and in one round, 29.5 seconds of opening is performed once. In the case of a short hit, for example, it is operated for 2 rounds (2R), and in 1 round, it is opened once for 0.9 seconds. To further explain, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit are compared in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice. That is, the operation of the large winning opening 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of the short hit and the case of the small hit, and the short hit and the small hit are distinguished only from the operation of the large winning opening 125 on the game board 110. You can't.

In the case of a small hit, it is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the large winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the big winning opening 125 must be opened a plurality of times in a row. Therefore, when it is difficult to visually distinguish between the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, in the case of a small hit, the cumulative opening time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds. An operation mode in which the large winning opening 125 is opened twice or more is set, and in the short hit, the number of rounds equal to the number of times the small hit is opened is set.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then in the large winning opening operation control unit 237, the number of winnings C to the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). (S) It is determined whether or not it is more than or equal to (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winnings C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the large winning opening 125 is continued, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or when the winning number C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1709), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the large winning opening 125 (closed). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of operating rounds R of the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value is not reached, the remaining operations are performed, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big hit game flag among the ending operations set in each of the long hit game and the short hit game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the ending command in the RAM 203 for performing the effect in the ending operation according to the big hit game flag in the effect control unit 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the staging control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then performs an ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is preset. It is determined whether or not the power time (ending time) has passed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 turns off the big hit game flag after passing through the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718). The large winning opening process is completed (S1719). The content of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). Then, if it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operation after S1705 is executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operation after S1708 is executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. 17 as a premise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These determinations can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). Since these determinations are substantially the same as those of S1202, S1203, and S1205 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state is not changed, so the game state setting process is terminated.
When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, Yes in S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state. Further, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is reached.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after the jackpot is a low-probability time-saving non-game state.

When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery J. (S1808). In this case, the initial value of the lottery number J is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high accuracy flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is established.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the number of lottery times X. (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a high-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is reached.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not opened, so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 then determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1902).

When the electric tulip 123 is not operating (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903) and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S1904). .. Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processing of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting by S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, the opening time is 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern that opens three times in time is set. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state is in the state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and it becomes easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (electric chew support). Is done. It should be noted that a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time reduction flag is ON or OFF are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is operating (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 elapses the opening time in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operating state (opening state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so that the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a random number determination method, which is performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), the normal symbol process (FIG. 16), and the like, will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
FIG. 20 (a) shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number used in a special symbol lottery, FIG. 20 (b) shows a configuration example of a jackpot symbol random number used in a special symbol lottery, and FIG. 20 (c) shows a special symbol lottery. An example of the structure of the reach random number used and an example of the structure of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20 (d).

Referring to FIG. 20A, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is in the low probability state and the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is in the high probability state. Two types of and a small hit are set. The range of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when the start ports 121 and 122 are won in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times higher than in the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state. Further, the winning value of the small hit is set to three regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, to explain by taking a special symbol lottery in a low probability state as an example, the jackpot random number values (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 are shown in FIG. 20. It is determined whether or not the value matches "5", which is the winning value of the big hit lottery in the low probability state in (a). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery for small hits.

With reference to FIG. 20B, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent symbol. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols indicating that they are jackpots in a low-probability state, and among them, the low-probability symbol A is a jackpot in a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability short-time gaming state. Show that there is. The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a big hit in a low-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B indicate that they are long hits (15 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability time-shortening gaming state. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate that they are long hits (8 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. The high-probability symbol E indicates a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability short-time non-game state jackpot. The latent probability symbol is a symbol indicating that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a big hit in a high-probability short-time non-game state. Therefore, the high-probability symbol B and the latent probability symbol have the same gaming state after the big hit game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent effect that does not clearly notify the player that the high-probability symbol is in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high-probability symbol B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. Further, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol A is 35/250 (= 7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (= 3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (= 2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (= 15/25).

In the high-probability symbol B, five values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 5/250 (= 1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (= 1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (= 1/50).

In the latent probability symbol, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the latent symbol is 100/250 (= 2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent probability symbol is not assigned to the second starting port 122, and if the second starting opening 122 is won, the winning value in the latent probability symbol will not be won.

Here, to explain using the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is shown in FIG. 20 (b). ), It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of the low probability symbol A, "0 to 34". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery such as low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by making the winning probability of the type of jackpot different between the case where the first starting port 121 is won and the case where the second starting opening 122 is won, various playability can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that it becomes easier to aim at either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 in a specific state (mode). It is also possible to encourage the player to participate in a more active game by configuring the above.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment can set a set value which is a stage of the degree of advantage of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to any one of, for example, six stages of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1", the winning probability is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1" and the probability is low, the winning probability is 1/300. Further, when the set value is "1" and the probability is high, the winning probability is 10/300.
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "6", the winning probability is the highest. For example, when the set value is "6" and the game is in a low probability gaming state, the winning probability is 1/285. Further, when the set value is "6" and the probability is high, the winning probability is 10/285.
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. The reach random number is set according to the number of holdings as described later. Here, as an example, a reach random number when the number of pending numbers is 0 will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) in which the reach effect can be executed is set (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). Twenty-two random number values are assigned to (with reach), and 228 random number values are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) in which the reach effect is not a feasible variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if a big hit is not made in the special symbol lottery, the reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Here, the reach effect is an effect performed on the image display unit 114 when the special symbol changes. Hereinafter, the effect at the time of special symbol change in which the reach effect is not a feasible variation pattern is referred to as the effect without reach, and the effect at the time of the special symbol change in which the reach effect is a feasible variation pattern corresponding to this is referred to as the effect with reach. Called.

Here, to explain with reach as an example, the reach random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is the reach in FIG. 20 (c). It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of "0 to 21". Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter, when these are not distinguished, they are referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222). , An effect using a decorative pattern is performed on the image display unit 114. The decorative design is configured by displaying, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display units 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. Generally, when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, three identical numbers are lined up in a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally in the stop display of the decorative symbol. The effect using the decorative symbol performed along with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable effect.

In the reach-with effect, the following operations are performed with respect to the decorative pattern as a variable effect. First, one of the two symbols (sequential sequence) is temporarily stopped before the decorative symbol that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixedly stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Further explaining, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scroll speed, giving the player the expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on a straight line. Then, after the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixedly stopped.
Here, in the effect with reach, the SP reach effect or the SP / SP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixedly stopped. The SP reach production is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that expects a bigger hit than the reach, and is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. .. In addition, SP / SP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that expects a bigger hit than SP reach, and it is a moving image in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. It is a production of.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21 described later, in the present embodiment, the SP reach or the SP / SP reach effect is set to be executed when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds). .. The above-mentioned variable effect performed together with the reach effect is also referred to as a reach-time variable effect.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, the horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or vertical (horizontal) or vertical (horizontal) or vertical The symbol is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line that extends diagonally.

As described above, when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is a loss, the reach random number can perform the reach effect as a variable pattern in which the reach effect can be executed on the image display unit 114, or the reach effect can be executed. Decide whether to perform a non-reach effect that does not have a variable pattern. In addition, the reach random number is designed to give the player an appropriate sense of expectation while enabling efficient game progress by changing the execution ratio of the reach effect according to the number of holds.
In addition, if the jackpot is won, the effect with reach will be performed, and finally the decorative pattern will be fixedly stopped with the same numbers aligned on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped in the state where the same numbers are not aligned on the above straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the state of no time saving, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, to explain by taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the winning random number value (see S1003) acquired when the game ball of the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 passes is shown in FIG. 20 (see S1003). It is determined whether or not it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the ordinary symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of hits having different contents (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) of the auxiliary game performed when it is determined to be a hit in the ordinary symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set as in the case of the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 17B) for specifying the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number by the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231 and is acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Identify the type of hit based on the random number value.
The range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown in the drawings.

[Example of setting fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of setting the fluctuation pattern and the table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 and a setting example of a table. Note that FIG. 21 shows a setting example of a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Although not shown, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is individually provided for other gaming states such as the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
Further, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 121. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be individually provided, or the game ball wins in the first starting port 121. The table to be referred to in some cases may be shared and referenced.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern random number. .. Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether or not it is done. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "high probability symbol A" in FIG. 21. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol fluctuation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

Further, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol variation control unit 233 is based on the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. To determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 has a reach random number value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value. , It is determined whether it is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" or the reach random number range "22 to 249" allocated to the hold number "0" of "missing" in FIG. 21. When the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is the reach random number range "0 to 21". 21 ”Variation pattern The variation pattern is determined based on which of the random number values is matched. For example, when the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 has the fluctuation pattern random value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball wins the start ports 121 and 122, and the gaming state and reach of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the conditions such as the presence or absence of the effect and the number of holdings. Then, the information on the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol is included in the fluctuation start command, and is sent from the game control unit 200 to the staging control unit 300. As will be described later, the effect control unit 300 corresponds to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) as the effect at the time of special symbol variation. Is selected and executed.

[Structure of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to the present embodiment. 22 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22 (a).

As shown in FIG. 22A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol hold storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. The storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each holding number is 4). .. Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage unit. It has a unit 204g and an eighth storage unit 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information indicating the distinction between the winning start ports (first start port 121 or second start port 122) is stored. It has an area where the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area where the symbol random number is stored, an area where the reach random number is stored, and an area where the fluctuation pattern random number is stored. That is, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are stored in each of the storage units 204a to 204h.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when a random number is already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the staging control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23A is a block diagram showing the configurations of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23B is a block diagram showing the configurations of the storage units shown in FIG. 23A.
As shown in FIG. 23 (a), the RAM 303 includes a first hold storage area 305 and a second hold storage area 306 as hold status storage areas for storing the situation in which the hold ball is held. The first reserved storage area 305 and the second reserved storage area 306 correspond to a hold for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 and a holding for winning a prize in the second starting port 122, respectively, and each has four storage units. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning on / off the hold flag and a notification flag storage for turning on / off the notification flag. Has an area and. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of the hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holdings due to winning the first starting port 121 is 3, the holding flag is turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the advance notice effect for each reserved ball based on the preliminary determination result. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the preliminary determination result according to the game state and the effect state. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the advance notice effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the advance notice effect is not performed. For example, when the advance notice effect is performed on the third reserved ball among the above three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

Further, although not particularly shown, apart from the configuration shown in FIG. 22 (a), the RAM 203 has an area in which pre-determination information is stored (hereinafter referred to as a pre-determination information storage area). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each of the above random numbers. The content of the pre-judgment information is the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). If it is, it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is the length at which the reach effect can be executed, or the content of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is unique to the information regarding the hold corresponding to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the pre-judgment processing has been performed (hereinafter referred to as hold information) or separately from this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S904, S911 in FIG. 9) according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (S2401), and if it determines that the game state is a high-probability state (Yes in S2401), the game control unit 200 is for the high-probability state. A table is selected and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, the table for the low probability state is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the pre-determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that the game state is the time saving state (Yes in S2404). A table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Further, a table for the time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, a table for time saving and no state is selected and the reach random number is preliminarily determined (S2407). Further, a table for time saving and no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2408).

After that, the game control unit 200 obtains the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot symbol random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, and the result of the pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. It is stored in the pre-determination information storage area as the pre-determination information (S2409). Further, in order to transmit the pre-determination information to the staging control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned pre-determination includes a random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and a determination table used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20). This was done using a judgment table having the same configuration as (see). That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1108 and FIG. 12 in FIG. 11) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining a random number separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random number in the pre-determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the pre-determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the pre-judgment has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

Further, although only the preliminary determination (whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol is also pre-reading (preliminary determination). I do. For the selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery, the random value for the variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122. (See) and (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern, the random value for selecting the fluctuation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table having the same configuration as the fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing are used for selection. Fluctuation patterns can be pre-read.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Further, as for the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. With this configuration, the number of control instructions related to look-ahead of variation pattern selection can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program can be suppressed.

If the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process at the time of special symbol change are performed by the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so that the pre-judgment result and the special symbol change time. The judgment result by the jackpot judgment processing may be different. That is, after the execution of the pre-determination process, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state or a time-saving no state) has changed by the start of the special symbol change. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between the execution of the pre-determination process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. .. Therefore, even if the same random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes by the start of the special symbol change after the pre-determination process is executed in the effect control unit 300, the effect based on the pre-determination result is not executed (prohibited) control or the like. You may do.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the staging control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the staging control unit 300 displays a message "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state. It is displayed on 114. Further, the staging control unit 300 limits the output of an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state from the speaker 156 and the output of music, voice, sound effects, or the like. Further, the staging control unit 300 lights the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, as an embodiment showing an abnormal state.

In addition, here, it has been explained that the staging control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred, but one of these has been described. It may be an embodiment using a unit. Further, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when a door opening error occurs, all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Further, when a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a clerk of a gaming store (pachinko hall) or the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in a gaming machine.

[Operation of the staging control unit]
Next, the operation of the staging control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the operation of the staging control unit 300.
The operation of the staging control unit 300 includes the main process shown in FIG. 25 (a) and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 25 (b). Referring to FIG. 25A, the staging control unit 300 first makes initial settings at startup (S2501), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (S2502), and then follows the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the staging control (S2503), the interrupt process is accepted.

The interrupt processing is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25B, in this interrupt process, the staging control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect content (effect pattern) is selected. Further, the effect control unit 300 performs an effect button process for accepting an operation of the effect button 161 or the like by the player (S2512). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command transmission process of transmitting a command including information of the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, the image display and sound output to the image display unit 114, the operation of the movable accessory 115, the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like are performed.

[Command reception processing by the staging control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25B).
In this command reception process, the staging control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (S2601). The pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 9 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and the output process (S806) shown in FIG. ) Is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when the effect control unit 300 determines that the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (Yes in S2601), the effect control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the hold number held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Further, the effect control unit 300 performs the pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2603). The content of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-determination result command or the hold number increase command (No in S2601), the staging control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation start command (S2604). This fluctuation start command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variable start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes the effect selection process (S2605). Further, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. 25 (a). The details of the effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the staging control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is a variable stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control unit 300 executes the process during the end of the variable effect (S2607). In the process during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets the variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM 303.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604, and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command. It is determined whether or not the command is an opening command (S2608). This opening command is a command set in the stopped processing shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the staging control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes the jackpot effect selection process (S2609). The details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, and S2608), the effect control unit 300 receives a jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is an ending command for starting the ending operation of (S2610). This ending command is a command set in the large winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the staging control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes the ending effect selection process (S2611). The details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold count increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608, and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , The customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). The details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG. 26.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Further, the staging control unit 300 analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (predetermined effect pattern) used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-determination effect pattern, various effect patterns can be provided so as to give notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a hold display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218 and the second special symbol hold indicator 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, a hold display suggesting the occurrence of hold and the number of holds is performed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display effect, by reflecting the pre-judgment result in the display mode of the hold display and the like, the player is informed of the judgment result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing for the hold ball. It can be a suggestive pre-judgment effect.

Although the case where the hold display effect is used as the pre-judgment effect is described here, various advance notice effects can be obtained by reflecting it in various effect contents performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. Will be able to do. For example, an effect using an effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, an effect by emitting light from a board lamp 116 or a frame lamp 157, an effect by the operation of a movable accessory, an effect by acoustic output such as music or sound effects, etc. are performed in advance. It can be set as a judgment effect pattern.

Further, the pre-determination effect is executed in accordance with the symbol change for other winning balls performed before the symbol change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination is performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four per one starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). In addition, priority shall be given to the digestion of the reserved ball at the second starting port 122. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball having a second starting port 122, a change currently being changed (referred to as the change) is included before the symbol change for the held ball is performed. The symbols of up to four winning balls will be changed. In the advance notice effect related to the reserved ball for which the pre-judgment has been made, if the symbol change is performed multiple times before the symbol change is performed for the reserved ball, the advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) spanning the multiple symbol changes. ) May be performed.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the hold number command including the value of the hold number after addition and the information of the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process in the RAM 303 (S2804). The hold number command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image / sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determination effect pattern. By receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 draws an image or sound corresponding to the selected pre-determination effect pattern on the VDP 314, and creates a display list or the like for output processing. The VDP 314 reads image data and acoustic data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. ..

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S2812). Then, the staging control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation due to an image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the staging control unit 300 sets the RAM 303 with a variable staging start command instructing the start of execution of the selected staging (S2814). The variation effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variation effect pattern. By receiving the variation effect start command, the CPU 311 draws an image or sound corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern on the VDP 314 and creates a display list or the like for output processing. The VDP 314 reads out image data and acoustic data for expressing the selected variation effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the variation effect by using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation effect pattern of the symbol variation in S2813, the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the background effect, the advance notice effect, and the like are determined. The decorative symbol variation display is an effect display performed by the image display unit 114 in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol performed by the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In the variable display of this decorative pattern, a reach effect or the like is executed. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, it is one of the effect random numbers (random number updated in S2503 of FIG. 25A). , The effect random number value is acquired when the variation start command is received), and the variation effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) of FIG. 26.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot symbol) (S3001), and selects an effect pattern (big hit effect pattern) (S3002). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and acoustic data used for the effect by the selected jackpot effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). As a result, the production during the big hit is determined. In the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), the determination may be made based on the random number value acquired at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG. 26.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S3102). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and acoustic data used for the effect according to the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), a determination may be made based on the random number value acquired at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The staging control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the staging control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, when the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the staging control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after Yes in S3204 or ON in S3203), the staging control unit 300 then determines whether or not the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). Is determined (S3205). If the time is not up (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and issues a customer wait effect command for performing the customer wait effect (demo effect) to the RAM 303. Is set to and the customer waiting command reception process is terminated (S3207).

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable effect start command, the variable effect end command, the jackpot effect start command, the ending effect start command, and the customer waiting effect command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button process (S2512 in FIG. 25 (b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 by the player has been operated during the predetermined reception period (valid period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes that the effect button 161 is pressed to turn ON, and the center key and surrounding keys of the effect key 162 are pressed to turn ON. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 such as a touch panel, the operation of the device is detected. The staging control unit 300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.

If an operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and ends the effect button process. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) of FIG. 25B, and issues the command set in the RAM 303 by the above command reception process and effect button process to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image / acoustic control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, sound output, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. To execute the set effect.

[Display information of information display in each game section]
Next, the display information of the information display 230 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 32. In the table of display information of FIG. 32, the section counter value (type of the game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in FIG. 32 starts with the first power-on. In addition, the setting of a total of 60,000 outs is a value that can approximately guarantee the daily operation of 100 pachinko machines per minute. Normally, the base value is always displayed in 2 digits in the numerical segment. Further, when the number of outs during normal times is "0" and when the base value during normal times is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numerical segment.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 230 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 230 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal medium base value, the normal base value is "0", or the normal medium out number is "0". "00" indicating that there is, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value. There is "99." indicating that is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If the number is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 230, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal middle outs of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which does not reach a sufficient quantity for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed on the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 230 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, an out ball composed of a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning opening 126, the first starting opening 121, the second starting opening 122, and the large winning opening 125 by the out ball detection switch 227, and a game ball that has flowed into the discharge port 117. Instead of detecting, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 227. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs) each time the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 227, the normal winning opening switch 217, the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, and the large winning opening switch 215. , Usually the number of outs in the middle) should be added by 1.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the image / acoustic control unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image / acoustic control unit 310. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from a power supply board (not shown) to the CPU 311.

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interruptions in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial setting of the CPU such as the setting of the built-in register, the access permission to the RAM 313, the initialization of the entire RAM area of the RAM 313 (0 clear), and the CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating the timer interrupt. Start up, etc., and allow all interruptions in step T3.

The CPU 311 performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk. ) And the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the amount of light (0 to 5). Any), a process for switching the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the light amount value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) is performed.

Here, the changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board as the main board, and the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the display device (image display unit 114, sub display unit 114). Separately, the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the display device)) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, panel lamp 116) for displaying the image related to the effect is switched.
It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch (not shown) can always be performed if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power ON state (after the image / sound control unit 310 is started). It has become.

The CPU 311 performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 is based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. Perform processing to adjust (value).

The CPU 311 performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the amount of light (the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114) based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. Perform processing to adjust the value).

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the effect key 162 is restricted (restricted) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the decorative symbol 41). .. Further, between the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and the time when the progress control of the game is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, the setting confirmation mode, and various drive sources Important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error (until the timer interruption is started on the game control board during initial operation) , Unauthorized winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are also regulated (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. Etc.), and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various staging sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease.

The CPU 311 performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114 is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 300 has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process is transferred to step T9.

The CPU 311 performs the animation pattern setting process in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

The CPU 311 performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 is performed.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not the frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing for updating the display image of the image display unit 114 is set in the RAM 313. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set every time the image / acoustic control unit 310 receives a V blank signal transmitted from the VDP 314 every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing / display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). It is set by the V blank interrupt process executed in. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The CPU 311 clears the frame switching flag set in the RAM 313 in step T12, and performs the scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the above-mentioned V blank interrupt processing are referred to, and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in the above step T9. , Performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The CPU 311 performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to VDP314, and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. It will be done. That is, the frame update timing is set to the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable effect, jackpot notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed by the image display unit 114. .. The effect directly controlled by the effect control unit 300 or the lamp control unit 320 (the effect operation of the movable accessory 115) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The CPU 311 performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the image / sound control unit 310.

As a result, the image / acoustic control unit 310 performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the speaker 156. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variation effect and at the end of the variation effect (stop of the decorative symbol 41), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk, but the player can adjust the amount. Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the operable effect key 162 are restricted (restricted). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook important points such as the start of the variable effect and the end of the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error, During the notification (output of the notification sound) of the door opening error), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. And light amount adjustment is regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store side regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience that the player who is trying to adjust the volume and the light amount does not notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. Etc.), and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various staging sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormal notification sound due to various staging sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that during the abnormality notification (output of the notification sound), the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, and the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be disabled. May be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit)
FIG. 34 will be used to explain the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit 320. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the game control unit 200. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 executes the origin return process of the accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" for.

The CPU 321 determines in step R103 whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) to the origin position is executed, or initial processing is performed. Perform processing such as setting the number to "2". The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , End the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 34, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the return operation of the various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories do not coexist, and the return operation and the initial operation and the initial light emission can be confirmed separately. ..

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 34, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is "0". judge. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target for returning to the origin is movable in step R105-2. It is set to the accessory 115 (movable staging device), and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. It is set in the sub display device (not shown), and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

The CPU 321 drives a drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position in step R105-6, and the board accessory is moved in step R105-7. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return error has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value. Moves the process to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets the return abnormality information (movable effect device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and sets the RAM 323 to step R105. At -10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

In step R105-11, the CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-image display unit (not shown) is driven. If the processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin. do.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 161) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-20.

The CPU 321 determines in step R105-13 whether or not the effect button 161 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 161 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 161 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 161 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

The CPU 321 drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to the origin position in step R105-14, and the effect button 161 is set within a predetermined time in step R105-15. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. The origin return processing of is finished.

The CPU 321 sets the return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161 in the RAM 323 in the step R105-17, and clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer in the step R105-18.

The CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 161) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the CPU 321 executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number. 2 ”is set, and the origin return processing this time is completed.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 35, the origin position (standby position) is the origin position (standby position) between the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) whose effect positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on. If not, do not return both to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but return to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other due to difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent both accessories from exerting a load on each other, and both accessories are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 35, the return operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin position and the frame accessory (effect button 161) are returned to the origin position. It is possible to execute the return operation to the origin position at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 35, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are performing a return operation and the effect operation is not performed even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 35, the return operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin position and the frame accessory (effect button 161) are returned to the origin position. When both the return operations to the origin position are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separately check the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories. ..

The movable accessory 115 and the sub image display unit (not shown) are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub image display unit (not shown)). At the same time, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. It becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board bonus processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board bonus is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 to perform the initial operation and the initial light emission of the board accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects a board bonus initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 37 (a)) for determining the board bonus initial operation pattern. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a), from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine one initial motion pattern.

In step R107-6, the CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board bonus processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board bonus processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has been completed in all steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the processes, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the processes, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "1", the board bonus processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 161) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 161 is set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 37B) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, referring to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b), one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON command. ..

In step R107-16, the CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing.

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161). Can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various characters, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the various characters from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, when the movable accessory 115 constituting the board accessory and the sub image display unit (not shown) have a return abnormality, the movable accessory 115 and the sub image display are displayed. The initial operation of the part (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, when the effect button 161 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 161 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the staging button 161 is completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the staging button 161 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed and the return error is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the above occurs is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 36, both the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161) are both. The initial operation process ends when is completed. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, it may be unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is such that the other performs the effect operation. It disappears.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 37A is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table for determining an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation. The number of steps of is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when the power-on designation command is received, or when the first power recovery designation command, which indicates that the customer is waiting, is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

"Movable staging device small descent" is an operation in which the movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and "movable staging device large descent" is an operation. The movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to the effect position below the intermediate position, and the "movable effect device origin return" is an operation in which the movable accessory 115 returns to the standby position. It has become.

"Move sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-image display unit (not shown) rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "return to the origin of the sub-display device" is the sub-image display unit (not shown). Is an operation to return to the standby position.

The "movable effect device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided on the movable accessory 115, and the "sub display device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub image display unit (not shown). It is the LED of.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the movable staging device LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 115a. Is blinking red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described, but this point is sub due to the return abnormality of the sub image display unit (not shown). This is because the display device LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) is that the board role is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the RAM 203. The point is that the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the object (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the panel accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is at least the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of one of the movable accessory 115 and the sub image display unit (not shown) may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

Further, when the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 and / or the sub image display unit (not shown) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation that is not in the initial operation at the time may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power-on. By doing so, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) is that the board accessory (movable accessory 115, A point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) is that the initial light emission of the movable staging device LED is emitted when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While the modes are the same, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that while the initial light emission mode of the movable effect device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED differs between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED. The embodiments may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable staging device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. .. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) is that when the power is turned on, when the special symbol is changed, or when the power is restored during the jackpot game. A point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) is that it is restored at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. There is a point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs from that at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration that restores the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display are turned off. The device LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as when the power supply is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) is that the movable accessory 115 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If there is no return abnormality in the sub image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the sub image display unit (not shown) is performed without performing the initial operation of the movable accessory 115, and the return abnormality occurs in the movable accessory 115. If there is no return abnormality in the sub image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 is performed and the initial operation of the sub image display unit (not shown) is not performed. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 37B is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161).

The type of the command when the power is turned on and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "effect button large rise" is an operation in which the effect button 161 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the effect position (upper position), and the "effect button origin return" means that the effect button 161 is in the standby position. It is an operation to return to.

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the frame combination is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the RAM 203. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the object (effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. There is a point that the operation is made to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the frame accessory (effect button 161) is used when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. The point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation is different can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the power is turned on, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or the power is restored during the jackpot game. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on and the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. The point is that the number of emission colors in the above is different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. The point that the emission color that is not included in the emission color in the above is included. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the time during which the effect button 161 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is effective during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 161 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the effect button 161 during the period. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 161.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 161 for which the presence or absence is detected is overlapped with the initial operation of the effect button 161 to be executed. Therefore, the operation confirmation of the effect button 161 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of the effect when various drive sources are initially operated during the setting change.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, first large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating the electric tulip 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221, second) is turned off. Special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol indicator 223, first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status indicator 224, status check The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON, RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230. finish. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the state before the start to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and information is provided. In the display 230, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during RAM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated during RAM clear preparation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, first large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating the electric tulip 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221, second) is turned off. Special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol indicator 223, first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status indicator 224, status check The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clear preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RAM is being cleared is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RAM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press RAM clear again" and "solenoid operation" are confirmed to prompt the user to confirm the operation of various drive sources and that the RAM is being prepared for clearing. Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please") is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, when the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and the RAM clear preparation are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the game control unit 200 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and information is provided. In the display 230, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while checking the settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, first large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating the electric tulip 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221, second) is turned off. Special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol indicator 223, first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status indicator 224, status check The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode and starts the game progress control. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being confirmed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is also completed. do. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the state before the start to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the movable body (electric tulip 123, grand prize opening door 125D) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since the various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, large prize opening door opening / closing part 216) are initially operated, the game progresses when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game store. It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the display excluding the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Instrument 130 (1st special symbol display 221, 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, 1st special symbol hold display 218, 2nd special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the status display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. It becomes possible to concentrate on.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Setting change notification for (RAM clear preparation notification for prompting RAM clear preparation and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification for setting confirmation and setting confirmation notification for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game shop staff) who check the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. Can be done.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shortening the development period, etc.) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the set value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation time of various drive sources is immediately reached even before the operation time has elapsed. Since the operation of various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is no longer performed in a game-enabled state, and it may be confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the light from the large winning opening LED is turned off. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming the operation of the large winning door 125D, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, an opening signal is output even though the first large winning opening 125 is open. Since it is not output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the game control unit 200, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used for games. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In this embodiment, "during the initial operation of the drive source" or "check the operation of the solenoid" that prompts the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change notification, the RAM clear preparation notification, and the setting confirmation notification. Etc. were not displayed, but such characters may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the RAM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Modification example when various drive sources are initially operated)
Hereinafter, a modification of the case where various drive sources are initially operated will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation processing is performed after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, first large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating the electric tulip 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221, second) is turned off. Special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol indicator 223, first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status indicator 224, status check The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON, RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 230 is used. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 230d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the game control unit 200 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RAM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RAM is cleared in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated after the RAM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, first large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating the electric tulip 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221, second) is turned off. Special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol indicator 223, first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, ordinary symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status indicator 224), image The display unit 114 and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clear preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, the RAM clear preparation notification described above is started.

When the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the game control unit 200 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of staging when various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, first large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating the electric tulip 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221, second) is turned off. Special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol indicator 223, first special symbol hold indicator 218, second special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status indicator 224, status check The display 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode and starts the game progress control. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 230 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 230d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the game control unit 200 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in order to operate the movable body (electric tulip 123, grand prize opening door 125D) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since the various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, large prize opening door opening / closing part 216) are initially operated, the game progresses when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game store. It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the display excluding the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Instrument 130 (1st special symbol display 221, 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, 1st special symbol hold display 218, 2nd special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the status display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. It becomes possible to concentrate on.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. It will be possible to make it.

Further, according to this modification, even if the state is before the start of the game progress control, the result of the game is affected after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since various drive sources for operating the given movable body are initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation). , It is possible to properly check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since the operation is started, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the RAM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode is completed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the pachinko gaming machine 100 can be simplified. (Reduction of development period, etc.) can be achieved.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the light from the large winning opening LED is turned off. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming the operation of the large winning door 125D, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the opening signal is output even though the first large winning opening 125 is open. Since it is not output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the game control unit 200, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used for games. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 from the turning on of the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed. However, by not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, since the set value and the performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 230 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement shop, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

[Variable staging pattern table]
44 and 45 are diagrams showing an example of setting a variable effect pattern and a table used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27 (b). Note that FIG. 44 shows a variable effect pattern table for big hits in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, and FIG. 45 shows a variable effect pattern table for small hits and misses in the low-probability time-saving no-game state.

A plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table for big hits shown in FIG. 44. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using FIG. 21 above, the variation effect patterns "EA1" to "EA6", ""EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.
Further, in the variation effect pattern table for small hits and misses shown in FIG. 45, a plurality of variation effect patterns are set. The variation effect patterns "ES1 to ES2" and "ER1" to "ER10" are one-to-one with respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. 21 above. It is associated.

Here, the variable effect is an effect for notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not a big hit) in a dramatic manner by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Further, in the illustrated variation effect pattern, "pseudo continuous number of times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", and "stop symbol" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-ream). This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative symbol, temporarily stops the decorative symbol, and then starts the variable display of the decorative symbol again before the reach state is reached. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed to make one change of the special symbol. Finish the variable display. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo stop state in which the decorative symbol seems to be stopped at first glance, but the symbol is actually slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is treated as if the fluctuation is continuing in terms of game control. Further, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol means a state in which the fixed symbol is fixed as a stop symbol in the variable display for one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo continuous staging, the staging control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbol again after the reach state is set. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 may change the decorative symbol and then start the variable display of the decorative symbol again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbol.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the number of pseudo-consecutive times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that makes a big hit expected. That is, it is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-consecutive times increases.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

The "stop symbol" indicates a combination of decorative symbols displayed as a stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the type of the stop symbol is "777", "666", "444", "RRR", "5X5" and the like. In the illustrated example, the type of the stop symbol is set according to the jackpot type. For example, in the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B, which are jackpots that are in a low-probability state after the jackpot, even-numbered stop symbols "444" and "666" are set. Further, in the high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol C, which are jackpots that are in a high-probability state after the jackpot, odd-numbered stop symbols "777" and "111" are set.

Now, the staging control unit 300 determines the variable staging pattern based on the table shown in FIG. 44. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG. 44.
For example, in FIG. 44, when the "big hit symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. Then, in this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

[Direction image]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, the staging image to be displayed on the image display unit 114 by the staging control unit 300 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 46, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes a decorative symbol 41, a variable image 51, a hold image 52, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, and a stage image 61. Further, although the details will be described later, the image display unit 114 has a stop light emission image 62, a hold change fanning image 63, a transition image 64, an SP reach image 65, an SPSP reach image 66, a button operation image 67, and a Zoro eye light emission image. 68, a resurrection image 69, a resurrection emission image 70, a right-handed image 71, and a restoration image 72 may be displayed.

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 46 (1), three decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When explaining each of the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle decorative symbol 41", and the right side. The symbol arranged in may be referred to as "right decorative symbol 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative symbols 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three decorative symbols 41". Further, the three decorative symbols 41 having the same numbers may be referred to as "doublet decorative symbols 41".

In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, a highly decorative display mode in which a character image or the like is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers (see FIG. 46 (1)) and characters such as numbers are displayed. There is a display mode with low decorativeness (see FIG. 54 (4)) to be displayed as a main body. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is switched according to a change in the gaming state or the progress of the effect. The details will be described later, but for example, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in other cases. Is displayed.

The effect control unit 300 variablely displays the three decorative symbols 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling (scrolling downward) in the variable effect of the decorative symbol 41, and then first, first, the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "0") is displayed. ”) Is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number“ 9 ”) is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative symbol (for example, the number“ 2 ”) is temporarily stopped. After all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in this way, finally, all the decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped according to the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, the combination "029" of the decorative symbol 41 which is stopped and displayed, which is shown in FIG. 46 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

[Variable image 51]
As shown in FIG. 46 (5), in the image display unit 114, the special symbol is being variablely displayed (during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The variable image 51 showing the above is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower left corner in the display area of the image display unit 114) when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the stop display is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Further, in the illustrated example, the glossy image 51A is displayed on the variable image 51. The glossy image 51A is an image that imitates glossiness. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, the variable image 51 changes the display mode of, for example, a color, a pattern, a shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “color, etc.”) based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, and informs the expectation of winning the jackpot. Or suggest. For example, when white, blinking, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the variable image 51, the expected degree may be set to be higher in this order. "Blinking" is a display mode that appears to be blinking.

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the reserved image 52 is an image showing that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
The display size of the reserved image 52 is smaller than that of the variable image 51. Further, in the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. Further, in the illustrated example, the glossy image 52A is displayed on the reserved image 52. The glossy image 52A is an image imitating glossiness. Further, a holding pedestal is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 changes the display mode such as color based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, and notifies or suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot. Further, when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit, the color of the type having a higher expectation is displayed than when it is out of order. For example, when white, blinking, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expected degree may be set to be higher in this order. In the following, the display mode of the variable image 51 which is white and the display mode of the reserved image 52 which is white may be referred to as a normal display mode.

Here, as described above, the winning at the first starting port 121 causes a maximum of four holds. Therefore, by winning a prize at the first starting port 121, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 are displayed side by side in the region on the right side of the variable image 51 from the position closer to the variable image 51 toward the position away from the variable image 51, that is, from the left side to the right side. ..

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four holds will occur even if a prize is won at the second starting port 122. Therefore, due to the winning at the second starting port 122, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms.

Further, in the following description, with respect to the four reserved images 52 displayed at the maximum, the "first reserved image 52", the "second reserved image 52", and the "third" are arranged in the order of proximity to the variable image 51, respectively. It may be referred to as "holding image 52" or "fourth holding image 52".

[Holding number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122.

[Small symbol 56]
As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the image display unit 114 has a special symbol on the image display unit 114 based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). A small symbol 56 indicating that the variable display is in progress (the decorative symbol 41 is being variablely displayed) is displayed. The small symbol 56 is controlled by the staging control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small symbols 56 are three images corresponding to the decorative symbols 41, respectively, and are displayed on the right side in the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative symbol 41. Further, as described above, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness or displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness, but the small symbol 56 may be displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness. Only displayed in. However, the small symbol 56 may be displayed depending on the display mode with high decorativeness.

The small symbol 56 is variablely displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in an manner indicating that the special symbol is being variablely displayed due to the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. In the small symbol 56, during scrolling, the display in which the numerical image is displayed while increasing by 1 from "1" to "9" and then increasing by 1 again from "1" is displayed, for example, 0.9 seconds per cycle. It is repeated in. Then, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped display small symbol 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41. Further explaining, in the example of FIG. 46 (1), the number corresponding to "029" of the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as the small symbol 56.

[Stage image 61]
As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background of the decorative symbol 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage or the like) related to the content (idol, animation character, or the like) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61. The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when the variation effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variation effect (for example, a variation effect in which the SPSP reach effect is performed) is performed. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

[Production example]
In the present embodiment, various effects are executed when the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114. For example, the effect when the effect image is displayed includes an operation effect. Further, although the details will be described later, the effects when the effect image is displayed include shift effect, enlargement effect, light emission effect, stop / non-display effect, hold change effect, increase display effect, display operation effect, and SP end. Includes display effects, promotion fanning effects, resurrection effects, resurrection non-display effects, and temporary stop fanning effects.

[Operation production]
In the present embodiment, the operation effect is executed. The motion effect is an effect of displaying the variable image 51 or the hold image 52 in motion. The motion display is a display that shows the player as if the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 is moving. In the present embodiment, the motion effect is executed according to the progress of the effect. More specifically, the motion effect is performed during the execution of the variable effect. Further, the operation effect of the present embodiment is performed even when the variable effect is not executed. By executing the motion effect, the player can focus on the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. In addition, it can be suggested that the display mode of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 changes by executing the operation effect.
In the present embodiment, as the operation effect, a rotation effect, a partial rocking effect, a whole rocking effect, and a blinking effect are performed. The specific contents of the rotation effect, the partial rocking effect, the whole rocking effect, and the blinking effect will be described in detail later.

[Variable staging example 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, the variation effect (variation effect example 1) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like will be specifically described. The variation effect example 1 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, in the variation effect example 1, two variation effects are performed.
Both of the two variation effects shown in FIGS. 46 to 49 are variation effects executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 45. When "ER1" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", an effect such as "normal" is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the staging control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 confirms and stops the highly decorative decorative symbol 41. And. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, the small symbol 56, and the stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all displayed in the normal display mode. At this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A is set to a predetermined initial position. It is displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "4" which is the hold number for winning a prize in the first start port 121, and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 is the second. 2 Indicates "0", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize at the starting port. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "4".

Then, when the number of pending winnings to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 is started as shown in FIG. 46 (2). To. When it is shown in the drawing that the small symbol 56 is variablely displayed (scrolled) at high speed, the small symbol 56 is displayed by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (3), the shift effect is started. At this time, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is started.
The shift effect is an effect of moving the reserved image 52. In this shift effect, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are the display position of the first reserved image 52, the display position of the second reserved image 52, and 3. It moves toward the display position of the third reserved image 52. Further, in the shift effect, the first reserved image 52 moves toward the display position of the variable image 51.
The rotation effect as an example of the operation effect is an effect of rotating the variable image 51 and the hold image 52. In the rotation effect, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 continue to rotate clockwise at a constant speed. Further, the rotation effect is started from the state where the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 is located at the initial position. Further, in the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 start rotating at the same time by the rotation effect.
By starting the rotation effect, the glossy image 52A is set to the non-initial position in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52. positioned. The non-initial position is a position different from the initial position. Further, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the positions of the glossy images 52A in the rotation direction are aligned.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (4), the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started. At this time, the enlarged effect is started.
The enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging the display size of the reserved image 52. More specifically, the enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging the display size of the first reserved image 52 to the display size of the variable image 51. In the enlargement effect, the display size of the first reserved image 52 is gradually enlarged.

Next, the enlargement effect and the shift effect are completed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (5), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. .. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all. It is located in the half-turn position. The half-turn position is a position when the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 or the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 is half-turned clockwise from the initial position. The half-turn position is an example of a non-initial position. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed (scrolled) at high speed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (6), the left decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of the variable display. When the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using the same display as the double quotation mark around the decorative symbol 41 for easy understanding. Further, at this time, a light emitting effect using the left decorative symbol 41 is performed.
The light emitting effect is an effect of causing a specific light emitting body provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 to emit light. Examples of the specific light emitting body include a display screen of the image display unit 114, a movable accessory 115, a board lamp 116, and the like. When the light emitting effect is realized by using the image display unit 114, the light emitting effect is to display an image to be shown to the player as if it is emitting light on the image display unit 114. In other words, the light emission effect is to display an image imitating light on the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, in the light emitting effect, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative symbol 41 (number “7”). The stop light emission image 62 is an image for showing the player as if the decorative symbol 41 is emitting light when it is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped. The stopped light emitting image 62 is, for example, an image imitating light. Further, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed for 0.5 seconds, for example, and then disappears. That is, the execution time of the light emitting effect using the stopped light emitting image 62 is 0.5 seconds. The stopped light emitting image 62 may be displayed in any color. Further, the stopped light emitting image 62 may be displayed in the whole or a part of the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed.
Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52A, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52 of the third reserved image 52. The images 52A are all located at the initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (7), the right decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of the variable display. At this time, a light emitting effect using the right decorative symbol 41 is performed. In the illustrated example, in the light emitting effect, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the right decorative symbol 41 (number “8”). At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all. Located in the half-turn position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (8), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of the variable display. At this time, a light emitting effect using the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is performed. In the illustrated example, in the light emitting effect, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 (number “5”). At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all. Located in the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (9), after the three decorative symbols 41 continue to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the three decorative symbols 41 are confirmed along with the stop display of the special symbol. Stop. Here, the combination “758” of the decorative symbols 41 that have been stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (9) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 is also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "758" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, any rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (10), the stop / non-display effect is started.
The stop / non-display effect is an effect of hiding the variable image 51 with the stop display of the special symbol. This stop non-display effect can also be regarded as an extinction effect that eliminates the variable image 51. In the stop / non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 displayed due to the opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 is hidden. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 is displayed in a translucent display mode. The transparency of the decorative symbol 41 does not change between before the fixed stop and after the fixed stop.
Further, when the stop / non-display effect is started, any rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all half-rotated. It is located in a position.

Next, the stop / non-display effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 47 (11), the variable image 51 is hidden. Here, as the variable image 51 is hidden, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 ends. Further, at this time, any rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, all the glossy images 52A are located at non-initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47 (12), any rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. Further, at this time, as the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is located at the initial position is displayed. More specifically, when the rotation effect is interrupted, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is located at the initial position is displayed regardless of the position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52 until immediately before the interruption. To.

Next, when the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 starts as shown in FIG. 48 (13). Will be done. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "3" to "2". Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (14), the shift effect is started. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is restarted.
Next, the enlargement effect is performed, the shift effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 48 (15), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, and the second reserved image 52 are displayed. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located at the half-turn position. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 has started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (16), the hold change effect using the second hold image 52 is started.
The hold change effect is an effect of notifying or suggesting the expectation of winning a jackpot based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination process by changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the display mode of the hold image 52. The hold change effect is started when the gloss image 51A of the variable image 51 and the gloss image 52A of the hold image 52 are located at the initial positions. Further, the hold change effect includes displaying the hold change fanning image 63. The hold change fanning image 63 is an image that fanns whether or not the display mode of the variable image 51 or the display mode of the hold image 52 changes.
Further, when the hold change effect using the second hold image 52 is started, any rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first hold image 52, and the second hold image 52 is continuously performed. ..

Next, the hold change effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 48 (17), the second hold image 52 is displayed in blue. The glossy image 52A and the aura image 52B are displayed on the second reserved image 52. The aura image 52B is an image imitating an aura. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located at the initial positions. Further, at this time, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at a predetermined initial position. At this time, a partial rocking effect is started.
The partial swing effect as an example of the operation effect is an effect of swinging a part of the variable image 51 or a part of the reserved image 52. In the illustrated example, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 continues to swing left and right in the partial swing effect. Further, the partial rocking effect is started from the state where the aura image 52B is located at the initial position. When the partial rocking effect is started, the aura image 52B first starts swinging to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (18), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are both in the rotation direction. The positions are aligned. Further, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at the right inclined position. The right tilted position is a position where the target image (aura image 52B in the illustrated example) is tilted to the right of the initial position.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings for winning the first starting opening 121 is added, as shown in FIG. 49 (19), the holding of the first starting opening 121 is held. The number display 55 switches from "2" to "3". Further, at this time, the increase display effect and the display operation effect are started. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "3".
The increase display effect is an effect of newly displaying the hold image 52 as the number of holds increases. In the increased display effect, the reserved image 52 is displayed in an opaque display mode after gradually changing from a display mode having high transparency to a display mode having low transparency. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in a translucent display mode.
The display-time operation effect is an effect of operating the hold image 52 when the hold image 52 is newly displayed. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 moves from the lower side to the upper side of the reserved pedestal corresponding to the third reserved image 52 in the display operation effect.
Further, when the increase display effect and the display operation effect are started, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are both. The positions in the rotation direction are aligned. Further, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at the left inclined position. The left tilted position is a position where the target image (aura image 52B in the illustrated example) is tilted to the left side of the initial position.

Next, the increase display effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 49 (20), the third reserved image 52 is displayed in an opaque display mode. Further, at this time, the display operation effect is completed, and the third reserved image 52 is displayed on the reserved pedestal corresponding to the third reserved image 52. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 is started. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all. The positions in the rotation direction are aligned. Further, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at the initial position. On the other hand, neither the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, nor the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 has reached the initial position. That is, the operation of the aura image 52B making one round trip in the left-right direction is completed before the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 make one rotation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (21), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative symbol 41, around the display area of the middle decorative symbol 41, and around the display area of the right decorative symbol 41, respectively. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are all initial. It is located in a position. Further, at this time, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is located at a non-initial position.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 49 (22), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination “412” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 49 (22) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 is also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, any rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the partial swinging effect of the second reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the aura image 52B is located at the left inclined position. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

50 and 51 are explanatory views of each effect in the variation effect example 1. The description of each effect shown in FIG. 50 corresponds to FIGS. 46 (1) to 47 (12). Further, the description of each effect shown in FIG. 51 corresponds to FIGS. 48 (13) to 49 (22).

As shown in FIG. 50, at the time point (T1) of the variation effect example 1, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is subtracted from "4" to "3", and the variation display of the special symbol is started. To.
After that, at the time point (T2), the variation display on the sub-first variation indicator 81 and the variation display of the small symbol 56 are started. Further, the sub-first hold display 83 changes from the "4" display to the "3" display. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3".
Then, at the time point (T3), the shift effect is started. Further, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 is started.

Then, at the time point (T4), the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started. In addition, the expansion effect is started.
After that, at the time point (T5), the shift effect and the enlargement effect are completed.
Then, at the time point (T6), the light emitting effect using the left decorative symbol 41 is started. Further, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reach the initial positions. Here, the time P1 from the time point (T3) to the time point (T6) is the rotation cycle in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. That is, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 repeatedly perform one rotation in the time P1 in the rotation effect. The time P1 is, for example, 2 seconds.

After that, at the time point (T7), the light emitting effect using the left decorative symbol 41 ends. Here, the time P2 from the time point (T6) to the time point (T7) is the execution time of the light emission effect. The time P2 is, for example, 1 second. That is, the time P2, which is the execution time of the light emission effect, is shorter than the time P1 which is the cycle of rotation in the rotation effect.
After that, at the time point (T8), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are initially used. Reach the position. Here, the time P3 from the time point (T6) to the time point (T8) is the rotation cycle in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. This time P3 is the same time as the time P1.

After that, at the time point (T9), the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, at the time point (T10), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped. Further, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed.

After that, at the time point (T11), the stop non-display effect is started.
After that, at the time point (T12), the rotation effect of the variable image 51 ends. In addition, the stop / hide effect ends.
After that, at the time point (T13), the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. Here, the time P4 from the time point (T10) to the time point (T11) is shorter than the time P5 from the time point (T11) to the time point (T12). Further, the time P4 is shorter than the time T6 from the time point (T12) to the time point (T13). Further, the time P5 is longer than the time P6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51, at the time point (T14), the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is subtracted from "3" to "2", and the variation display of the next special symbol is started. To.
After that, at the time point (T15), the variation display on the sub-first variation indicator 81 and the variation display of the small symbol 56 are started. Further, the sub-first hold display 83 changes from the "3" display to the "2" display. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "3" to "2".
Then, at the time point (T16), the shift effect is started. Further, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is restarted.

Then, at the time point (T17), the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started.
Then, at the time point (T18), the shift effect ends.
Then, at the time point (T19), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are located at the initial positions. In addition, the hold change effect is started.
Then, at the time point (T20), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 reach the initial positions. In addition, the hold change effect ends. In addition, a partial swing effect of the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 is started.

After that, at the time point (T21), the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is added from "2" to "3".
After that, at the time point (T22), the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from the “2” display to the “3” display. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "2" to "3". In addition, the increase display effect is started. In addition, the operation effect at the time of display is started.

After that, at the time point (T23), the increase display effect and the display operation effect are completed. In addition, the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 is started. Further, the aura image 52B of the second reserved image 52 reaches the initial position. Here, the time P7 from the time point (T20) to the time point (T23) is the swing cycle of the aura image 52B in the partial swing effect. The time P7 is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the time P7 is shorter than the time P1. In other words, the swing cycle of the aura image 52B in the partial swing effect is shorter than the rotation cycle in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the hold image 52. Further, the time P8 from the time point (T22) to the time point (T23) is shorter than the time P5. That is, the time from the start to the end of the increase display effect is shorter than the time from the start to the end of the stop non-display effect.

After that, at the time point (T24), the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51A, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 are initially used. Reach the position. Here, the time P9 from the time point (T23) to the time point (T24) is shorter than the time P1. That is, the time from the start of the rotation effect of the third reserved image 52 until the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 reaches the initial position is longer than the rotation cycle in the rotation effect of the reserved image 52. short.
After that, at the time point (T25), the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, at the time point (T26), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped. Further, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after updating the display content of the hold number display 55 when the number of holds decreases, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect when updating the display content of the hold number display 55, for example, when the hold number decreases.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after starting the variable display of the small symbol 56, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect, for example, when the variation display of the small symbol 56 is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 after the shift effect is started, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after starting the variation display on the sub-first variation display 81, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect, for example, when the variation display on the sub-first variation display 81 is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect, for example, when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the operation effect when the shift effect is started, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the operation effect before starting the shift effect. Further, the operation effect may be started after the shift effect is started. Further, the operation effect may be started when the shift effect is finished. Further, the motion effect may be started after the shift effect is finished.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect after updating the display content of the hold number display 55. In other words, the effect control unit 300 starts the movement display of the hold image 52 after the change in the display mode of the hold number display 55 according to the decrease in the hold storage stored in the RAM 203. Here, the hold image 52 is captured as the first hold display. Further, the hold number display 55 is regarded as a second hold display.
When the effect using the hold image 52 is performed, the player can easily pay attention to the hold image 52. Therefore, the player may recognize the change in the number of holds by starting the movement display of the hold image 52. be. In this case, if the display mode of the hold number display 55 does not change even if the movement display of the hold image 52 is started, the player may not be able to grasp the accurate hold number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by starting the moving display of the reserved image 52 after the change in the display mode of the reserved number display 55, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to accurately grasp the reserved number.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 ends the operation display of the variable image 51 after the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. In this case, even before the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the variation effect is completed by ending the operation display of the variation image 51.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 starts the moving display of the information display after the start of the variable display of the specific symbol. Here, examples of the specific symbol include a decorative symbol 41 and a small symbol 56. Further, as the information display, for example, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, and the like can be mentioned. Further, the moving display of the information display includes not only the moving display of the holding image 52 to the display area of the holding image 52 but also the moving display of the holding image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variation effect is started by starting the movement display of the information display even before the variation display of the specific symbol is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can start the movement display of the reserved image 52 after the start of the cycle display of the special symbol. Here, examples of the special symbol include a sub-first variation indicator 81 and the like. In this case, even before the cycle display of the special symbol is started, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display of the special symbol is started by starting the moving display of the reserved image 52.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 starts the movement display of the reserved image 52 after the cycle display of the special symbol is started. In this case, even before the cycle display of the special symbol is started, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display of the special symbol is started by starting the moving display of the reserved image 52.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 starts the moving display of the information display after the stop display of the decorative symbol 41. In this case, even before the stop display of the decorative symbol 41, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the variation effect is completed by starting the movement display of the information display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 can display the operation of the reserved image 52 at a predetermined cycle.
When the hold image 52 displays the operation, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect using the hold image 52, but even when the operation display of the hold image 52 different from the operation display in the hold change effect is performed. , There is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the hold change effect has been performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the hold image 52 in a predetermined cycle, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the motion display in the predetermined cycle is a hold change effect. Further, it is suggested that the hold change effect using the hold image 52 may be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 displays the reserved image 52 in operation at a predetermined cycle. On the other hand, after changing the display mode of the hold number display 55, the operation display of the hold number display 55 is not executed. In this case, since the operation display of the hold number display 55 is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to accurately grasp the hold number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays, for example, a first operation display in which the first reserved image 52 is displayed in a predetermined cycle, and a second operation display in which the second reserved image 52 is displayed in a predetermined cycle. It is possible to execute 2 operation display. Then, it is possible to display the first operation display and the second operation display in synchronization with each other. Here, the first reserved image 52 is captured as the first information display. Further, the second reserved image 52 is captured as a second information display.
In this case, the appearance of the reserved image 52 displayed in synchronization is improved as compared with the case where the first operation display and the second operation display are displayed out of synchronization, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 displays the reserved image 52 according to the first operation mode when the additional display of the reserved image 52 is started. The first operation mode is, for example, the operation mode of the reserved image 52 in the display operation effect. Then, the staging control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 by the second operation mode in which the hold image 52 is displayed by the first operation mode and then the operation is displayed at a predetermined cycle. The second operation mode is, for example, the operation mode of the reserved image 52 in the operation effect.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the reserved image 52 is additionally displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 displays the reserved image 52 in the first display mode when the additional display of the reserved image 52 is started. The first display mode is, for example, a display mode of the reserved image 52 during execution of the increase display effect. Then, the staging control unit 300 can display the reserved image 52 in the first display mode and then display the operation in a predetermined cycle according to the second display mode. The second display mode is the display mode of the reserved image 52 after the end of the increase display effect.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the reserved image 52 is additionally displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 can interrupt the operation display of the reserved image 52 in a predetermined cycle in a state where the variable image 51 is hidden after the stop display of the special symbol. be. In this case, it is possible to make the player grasp whether or not the special symbol is variablely displayed depending on whether or not the operation display of the reserved image 52 is performed at a predetermined cycle, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can.
The staging control unit 300 may hide the variable image 51 in a state where the operation display of the reserved image 52 at a predetermined cycle is interrupted after the stop display of the special symbol, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 executes the operation display of the reserved image 52 between the time when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed and the time when the next variation display is started, and after the start of the next variation display. It is also possible to execute the operation display of the reserved image 52. Examples of the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 include a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 41 and a fixed stop display of the decorative symbol 41.
In this case, the interest of the game can be improved even when the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 can display the variable image 51 in such a manner that the transparency of the variable image 51 is changed when the operation display of the variable image 51 in a predetermined cycle is completed. In this case, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort when the motion display of the variable image 51 ends, and the motion display of the variable image 51 can be terminated naturally, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
The staging control unit 300 may change the transparency of the variable image 51 after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 41 and then ending the operation display of the variable image 51 in a predetermined cycle. Further, after the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the transparency of the variable image 51 may be changed, and then the operation display of the variable image 51 at a predetermined cycle may be terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 changes the transparency of the variable image 51 in a state where the operation display of the variable image 51 is executed in a predetermined cycle after the stop display of the decorative symbol 41. After that, the variable image 51 can be hidden.
In this case, the variable image 51 can be hidden naturally by making it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort when the variable image 51 is hidden, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the operation of the reserved image 52 from the first aspect to the second aspect at a predetermined cycle, and after the movement display of the reserved image 52 is started. , It is possible to start the operation display from the first aspect. The first aspect is, for example, the initial position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52. The second aspect is, for example, a half-turn position of the glossy image 52A in the reserved image 52.
In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has started, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the reserved image 52 of the first display mode in the first cycle, and then displays the reserved image 52 of the second display mode in the second cycle different from the first cycle. It is possible to display the operation with. The first display mode is, for example, a normal display mode. The second display mode is, for example, a blue display mode.
In this case, the reserved image 52 in the first display mode and the reserved image 52 in the second display mode can be easily distinguished by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cycle of the operation in the operation display of the reserved image 52 and the execution time of the light emitting effect using the decorative symbol 41 are different.
In this case, since it becomes easy for the player to distinguish between the operation display of the reserved image 52 and the light emitting effect, it is possible to realize various effects and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the operation of the reserved image 52 in the first cycle, and can execute the switching display in which the small symbol 56 is switched and displayed in the second cycle. And the time is different between the first cycle and the second cycle.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation display of the reserved image 52 and the switching display of the small symbol 56 are linked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display the sub-first variation display 81 in the first cycle and then stop the display, and display the reserved image 52 in the second cycle. And the time is different between the first cycle and the second cycle. The cycle display is, for example, a blinking display.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the cycle display of the sub-first variable display 81 and the operation display of the reserved image 52 are interlocked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can move and display the decorative symbol 41 in the first direction in the variable display, and can move and display the reserved image 52 in the second direction. .. The first direction is, for example, the direction in which the decorative symbol 41 fluctuates. The second direction is the direction in which the reserved image 52 operates in the operation effect. The second direction is different from the first direction.
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to distinguish between the moving display of the decorative symbol 41 and the moving display of the reserved image 52, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Variable staging example 2]
52 and 53 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The variation effect example 2 is a variation effect executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 45. When "ER3" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal". Further, in the following description, the points different from the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 52 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the staging control unit 300. Further, at this time, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. At this time, the glossy image 52A and the aura image 52B of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are both located at the initial positions. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "2" which is the hold number for winning a prize in the first start port 121. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "2".

Next, when the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 starts as shown in FIG. 52 (2). Will be done. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "2" to "1". Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 displays "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), the shift effect is started. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52 and the second reserved image 52 is started. Further, at this time, the partial swinging effect of the first reserved image 52 is started.
Next, the shift effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the variable image 51 and the first reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops. At this time, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative symbol 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the reach effect is started. More specifically, the number "4", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops and enters the reach state. At this time, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the right decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the partial swinging effect of the variable image 51 is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the intermediate decorative symbol 41.
Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (8) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 is also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the partial swinging effect of the variable image 51 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 displays the hold number display 55 in the first area when the number of hold storages stored in the RAM 203 is one, and is different from the first area. The reserved image 52 is displayed in the two areas. Further, when the number of reserved storages stored in the RAM 203 is plurality, the reserved number display 55 is displayed in the first area, and the reserved image 52 is displayed in a third area different from the first area. Here, the first area is, for example, a display area of the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121. The second area is, for example, a display area of the first reserved image 52. The third area is, for example, a display area of the second reserved image 52.
In this case, it is possible to realize an effect using the reserved image 52 by using a wide display area, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the number of reserved images, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Variable staging example 3]
54 and 55 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The variation effect example 3 is a variation effect executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 45. When "ER4" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". Will be executed. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points of agreement with each of the above variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation effect example 3, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (6) in the variation effect example 2 is performed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started, the motion effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is started, and then the reach effect is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (1), the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 and the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), the transition image 64 is displayed. At this time, the SP start non-display effect is started.
The transition image 64 is an image that notifies or suggests that the SP reach effect is executed or that the SP reach effect ends. Here, as the transition image 64, a predetermined image is displayed, but a monochromatic image displayed in the entire image display area of the image display unit 114 may be used. For example, a so-called whiteout may be executed by displaying a white image as the transition image 64 on the image display unit 114. Further, a so-called blackout may be executed by displaying a black image as the transition image 64 on the image display unit 114.
The SP start non-display effect is an effect of hiding the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 when the SP reach effect is started. In the SP start non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed due to the opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. .. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode in the SP start non-display effect.
Further, when the transition image 64 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at the half-turn position. Further, at this time, the operation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is continuously performed.

Next, the SP start / non-display effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. Along with this, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), the SP reach effect is started. At this time, the SP image 65 is displayed.
The SP image 65 is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP image 65 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.
When the SP reach effect is started, the left and right decorative symbols 41 move to the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display unit 114. The left and right decorative symbols 41 have a smaller display size and a lower decorative appearance than the decorative symbols 41 displayed before the start of the SP reach effect (see FIG. 54 (1)). ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the SPSP image 66 is displayed.
The SPSP image 66 is an image showing that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP image 66 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (6), the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness and with a display size larger than that of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (7), the transition image 64 is displayed. At this time, the SP end display effect is started.
The SP end display effect is an effect of displaying the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 when the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) ends. In the SP end display effect, the hidden variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode after gradually changing from a display mode having high transparency to a display mode having low transparency. Will be done. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode in the SP end display effect.
When the SP end display effect is started, the glossy image 51A and the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at the initial positions. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are started.

Next, the SP end display effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 55 (8), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (9), the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 55 (10), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 which are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (10) is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 is also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the information display when the special effect is executed in the specific effect. Further, in the specific effect, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed. Here, the specific effect is, for example, a reach effect. Further, examples of the special effect include SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect.
In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effect while making the player recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 can display a predetermined information display that changes from the first display mode to the second display mode different from the first display mode. Then, the effect control unit 300 hides the information display of the second display mode when executing the special effect in the specific effect, and notifies by the decorative symbol 41 that the special game is not performed. In addition, the information display of the second display mode can be redisplayed. Further, in the specific effect, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed. The first display mode is, for example, a normal display mode. The second display mode is, for example, a blue display mode. The special game is, for example, a jackpot game.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the special effect while making the player recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, by redisplaying the information display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has not been completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the information display when the special effect is executed in the specific effect and when the special effect is not executed in the specific effect. It may not be set to. Then, in the specific effect, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special effect while making the player recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the decorative symbol 41 changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when the special effect is executed in the specific effect, and can display information. It is possible to hide the operation from the displayed state. Here, the first display mode is, for example, a display mode of the decorative symbol 41 having high decorativeness. Further, the second display mode is a display mode of the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness.
In this case, the player can be concentrated on the special production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Variable staging example 4]
56 and 57 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. The variation effect example 4 is a variation effect executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 44. When "EA2" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". Will be executed. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points of agreement with each of the above variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation effect example 4, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 54 (1) to 54 (3) in the variation effect example 3 is performed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started, the motion effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is started, then the reach effect is started, and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden, and the SP reach effect is performed. Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (1), the SP image 65 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (2), the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the SPSP image 66 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), the doublet decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "444", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative symbol 41 is larger than that during the execution of the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 56 (2)). Further, at this time, the small symbol 56 maintains a state in which the three symbols are variablely displayed. Further, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are maintained in a hidden state. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (4), the promotion fanning effect is started.
The promotion fanning effect is a production that fuels whether or not to be promoted. Here, promotion is a decoration that informs or suggests that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state after the decorative symbol 41 that informs or suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is temporarily stopped. It is an effect that changes to the symbol 41. In the illustrated example, the button operation image 67 is displayed as a promotion fanning effect.
The button operation image 67 is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 161. By displaying this button operation image 67, the player can recognize that it is the timing to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 67. When the button operation image 67 is displayed, the valid period suggestion image suggesting the valid period of the operation of the effect button 161 may be displayed together with the button operation image 67. Then, after the valid period of the operation of the effect button 161 has passed, the valid period suggestion image may be hidden.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed again in the combination of "444" as shown in FIG. 56 (5). That is, as a result of the promotion fanning effect, promotion is not performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (6), the light emitting effect using the doublet decorative symbol 41 is started. In the illustrated example, as the light emitting effect, the effect of displaying the doublet light emitting image 68 around each display area in the doublet decorative symbol 41 is performed.
The doublet light emitting image 68 is an image showing the player as if the decorative symbol 41 of doublet that is temporarily stopped is emitting light. The doublet emission image 68 is, for example, an image imitating light. The doublet emission image 68 may be displayed in any color. Further, the doublet emission image 68 may be displayed in whole or a part of the area where each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is displayed. The time for displaying the doublet emission image 68 is, for example, 2.5 seconds. That is, the execution time of the light emitting effect using the doublet decorative symbol 41 is longer than the rotation cycle in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (7), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. The combination of numbers "444" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "444" is stopped and displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "444". Further, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are maintained in a hidden state. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the information display is hidden when the special effect is executed, and the decorative symbol 41 notifies that the special game is to be performed, and then the information display is displayed. It may not be done. Then, in the specific effect, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed.
In this case, the player is made aware that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the player is made to pay attention to the special effect, and the decorative symbol 41 is notified to the player that the jackpot game is determined to be performed. It can be noticed and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Variable staging example 5]
58 to 60 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. The variation effect example 5 is a variation effect executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 44. When "EB3" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP2" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP2" is executed as "SPSP reach". Will be executed. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points of agreement with each of the above variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation effect example 5, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 54 (1) to 54 (3) in the variation effect example 3 is performed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started, the motion effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is started, then the reach effect is started, and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden, and the SP reach effect is performed. Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the SP image 65 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the SPSP image 66 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), the transition image 64 is displayed. At this time, the SP end display effect is started. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are redisplayed. Both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode. At this time, the glossy image 51A and the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at the initial positions. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are started.

Next, the SP end display effect ends. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in an opaque display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), the revival effect is started. At this time, the resurrection non-display effect is started.
The revival effect is an effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 41 that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, and then displaying the decorative symbol 41 that notifies that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. be. In the illustrated example, the resurrection image 69 is displayed in the resurrection production. The resurrection image 69 is an image that informs or suggests that the resurrection effect is being performed.
The resurrection non-display effect is an effect of hiding the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 when the resurrection effect is performed. In the revival non-display effect, the transparency of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed due to the opaque display mode gradually increases, and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in a semi-transparent display mode in the resurrection non-display effect.
When the revival non-display effect is started, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at the half-turn position. Further, at this time, the aura image 51B of the variable image 51 is located at the left inclined position. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, the resurrection non-display effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 59 (8), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden. Along with this, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are completed. At this time, the light emitting effect is started. In the illustrated example, the revival light emission image 70 is displayed as a light emission effect.
The resurrection light emitting image 70 is an image showing the player as if the resurrection image 69 is emitting light. In the illustrated example, the resurrection emission image 70 is displayed around the display area of the resurrection image 69. The revival emission image 70 is, for example, an image imitating light. The resurrection emission image 70 may be displayed in any color. Further, the resurrection emission image 70 may be displayed in the whole or a part of the area where the resurrection image 69 is displayed. The time for displaying the resurrection emission image 70 is, for example, 3 seconds. That is, the execution time of the light emission effect using the resurrection image 69 is longer than the rotation cycle in the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the hold image 52.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), the doublet decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "444", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are maintained in a hidden state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (10), the promotion fanning effect is started. In the promotion fanning effect, the button operation image 67 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 59 (11). By displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "777" in this way, the player is notified that the promotion has been performed. Further, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are maintained in a hidden state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (12), a light emitting effect using the doublet decorative symbol 41 is started. In the illustrated example, as the light emitting effect, the effect of displaying the doublet light emitting image 68 around each display area in the doublet decorative symbol 41 is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (13), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. The combination of numbers "777" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "777" is stopped and displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "777". Further, at this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are maintained in a hidden state. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the information display is hidden when the special effect is executed, and the information is displayed after the notification by the decorative symbol 41 in the mode in which it is determined that the special game is not performed. After displaying, if the decorative symbol 41 notifies that it is determined that the special game will be performed, the information display may be hidden. Then, in the specific effect, the small symbol 56 is displayed regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the special effect while making the player recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, by redisplaying the information display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has not been completed. Further, by hiding the information display after that, the player can be focused on the decorative symbol 41 for notifying that the jackpot game is determined to be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Variable staging example 6]
61 and 62 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The variation effect example 6 is a variation effect executed when "EB5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 44. When "EB5" is selected as the "variable effect pattern", "N3" is executed as the "normal". Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points of agreement with each of the above variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, in this variation effect example 6, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (6) in the variation effect example 2 is performed. That is, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the operation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is started, and then the reach effect is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (1), the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 and the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), a temporary stop fanning effect is performed.
The temporary stop fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the middle decorative symbol 41, which has the same number as the left and right decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the number "4", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, moves from the upper side to the center of the display area of the image display unit 114 while gradually reducing the moving speed in the temporary stop fanning effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the combination of "444" by temporarily stopping the number "4" which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the promotion fanning effect is performed. In the promotion fanning effect, the button operation image 67 is displayed. Further, at this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 67 is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 61 (5). By displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "777" in this way, the player is notified that the promotion has been performed. Further, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), a light emitting effect using the doublet decorative symbol 41 is started. In the illustrated example, as the light emitting effect, the effect of displaying the doublet light emitting image 68 around each display area in the doublet decorative symbol 41 is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped along with the stop display of the special symbol. The combination of numbers "777" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "777" is stopped and displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "777". Further, at this time, both the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the rotation effect and the partial swing effect of the variable image 51 and the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 are continuously performed. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

[Variable staging example 7]
63 and 64 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. The variation effect example 7 is a variation effect executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 45. When "ER1" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", an effect such as "normal" is not executed. Further, the variation effect example 7 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points of agreement with each of the above variation effect examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), the staging control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 confirms and stops the highly decorative decorative symbol 41. And. Further, in the illustrated example, an image with the theme of the sea is displayed as the stage image 61. That is, the stage in the variable staging example 7 is a stage different from the stage in the variable staging example 1 to the variable staging example 6. The decorativeness of the decorative symbol 41 is different between this stage and the stage in the variable effect example 1 to the variable effect example 6. Further, at this stage, the reserved image 52 has a cross shape. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all located at predetermined initial positions. Further, in this stage and the stage in the variation effect example 1 to the variation effect example 6, the small symbol 56 is displayed in the same display mode. Further, at this time, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "4" which is the hold number for winning a prize in the first start port 121. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display is stopped on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "4".

Then, when the number of pending winnings to the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 is started as shown in FIG. 63 (2). To. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the shift effect is started. At this time, the overall rocking effect is started.
The overall swing effect as an example of the operation effect is an effect of swinging the entire variable image 51 or the entire reserved image 52. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 continues to swing left and right in the overall swing effect. Further, the overall rocking effect is started from the state where the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are located at the initial positions. When the overall rocking effect is started, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 first start swinging to the right.
When the overall rocking effect starts, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all located at non-initial positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (4), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started. At this time, the enlarged effect is started.
Next, the shift effect and the enlargement effect are completed, and as shown in FIG. 63 (5), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. .. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all located at the right tilted position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (6), the overall rocking effect is continuously performed. At this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all located at the left inclined position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (7), the overall rocking effect is continuously performed. At this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 all reach the initial position. That is, one reciprocating swing in the overall swing effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is completed. Here, the time required for one round-trip swing in the overall swing effect, that is, the swing cycle in the overall swing effect is, for example, 2 seconds. That is, the swing cycle in the overall swing effect is the same as the rotation cycle in the rotation effect (see FIG. 46 (3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the stopped light emitting image 62 is displayed around the display area of the left decorative symbol 41, around the display area of the middle decorative symbol 41, and around the display area of the right decorative symbol 41, respectively. Further, at this time, the overall swinging effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 64 (9), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination “412” of the decorative symbols 41 that have been stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (9) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 is also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, the overall swinging effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

[Variable staging example 8]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 8) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. This variation effect example 8 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, the variation effect example 8 is an example of variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In the following description, the points that differ from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65 (1), the staging control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 confirms and stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness. It is assumed that there is. Further, as the stage image 61, an image with the theme of the sky is displayed. Further, a right-handed image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 71 is an image for urging the player to launch the game ball into the right area of the game area 111. Further, as the reserved image 52, an image imitating a flame is displayed. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all located at predetermined initial positions. Further, in the variation effect example 8 and the variation effect example 1 to the variation effect example 7, the small symbol 56 is displayed in the same display mode. Further, at this time, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "0" which is the hold number for winning a prize in the first start port 121, and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 is the second. 2 Indicates “4”, which is the number of pending prizes for winning the starting port 122. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub second hold indicator 84 is displayed as "4".

Then, when the number of reservations for winning the prize in the second starting port 122 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 is started as shown in FIG. 65 (2). To. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3". Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is started. Further, at this time, the sub second hold indicator 84 is displayed as "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), the shift effect is started. At this time, the rotation effect is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 continues to rotate clockwise in the rotation effect. When the rotation effect is started, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52 are all positioned at non-initial positions in the rotation direction. Will come to do.

Next, the shift effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (4), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are all located at the half-turn position.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 65 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Here, the combination “758” of the decorative symbols 41 that have been stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (5) is an example of a combination in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, along with the stop display of the special symbol, the small symbol 56 is also stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination "758" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 all reach the initial position. That is, one rotation in the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is completed. Here, the time required for one rotation in the rotation effect in the high-probability time-saving game state, that is, the rotation cycle in the rotation effect in the high-probability time-saving game state is, for example, 2 seconds. That is, the rotation cycle in the rotation effect in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is the same as the rotation cycle in the rotation effect in the low-probability time-saving non-game state and the swing cycle in the overall swing effect. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is stopped.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, this one variation effect ends after the one variation effect starts and before the operation for one cycle in the operation effect is performed. You may try to do it. Further, even in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, in the variable effect in which the reach effect is performed, the operation for one cycle or more in the motion effect may be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display the hold image 52 in the first effect mode in the first display mode, and in the second effect mode, the hold image 52 is displayed in the second display mode. It can be displayed depending on the display mode. Further, the staging control unit 300 can display the hold image 52 of the first display mode in the first cycle, and can display the hold image 52 of the second display mode in the second cycle. be. And the first cycle and the second cycle are the same time. Here, examples of the first effect mode include a predetermined stage, a predetermined gaming state, and the like. Further, the second effect mode includes, for example, a stage different from the first effect mode, a gaming state different from the first effect mode, and the like.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the second display mode is the display mode after the hold change effect using the hold image 52 of the first display mode, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 completely completes the operation cycle of the hold image 52 in the operation effect in the first effect mode and the operation cycle of the hold image 52 in the operation effect in the second effect mode. It is the same as, but is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may have substantially the same cycle of operation in the motion effect of the hold image 52 in the first effect mode and the cycle of operation in the motion effect of the hold image 52 in the second effect mode. .. That is, the cycle of the operation of the hold image 52 in the operation effect in the first effect mode and the cycle of the operation of the hold image 52 in the operation effect in the second effect mode are not completely limited to the same.

[Variable staging example 9]
66 and 67 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The variation effect example 9 is a variation effect executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 45. When "ER1" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", an effect such as "normal" is not executed. Further, in the variation effect example 9, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off during the variation effect. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly described, and the points of agreement with each of the above variation effect examples may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66 (1), the staging control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 confirms and stops the highly decorative decorative symbol 41. And. At this time, in the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, the third reserved image 52, and the fourth reserved image 52, the glossy image 52A is set to a predetermined initial position. It is displayed. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 is displayed as "4" corresponding to the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "4".

Next, when the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the next special symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), the first special symbol holding display 218 Is displayed as "3". At this time, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 221.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), the variable display of the small symbol 56 is started. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), the shift effect is started. At this time, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is started.
Next, the shift effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Then, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 66 (6). At this time, the LED on the first special symbol hold display 218 and the LED on the first special symbol display 221 are turned off. At this time, the LED on the sub-first variable display 81 and the LED on the sub-first hold display 83 are turned off.

Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, as shown in FIG. 67 (7), the first special symbol hold indicator 218 is the number of holds for winning a prize in the first start port 121, "3". It becomes a display. At this time, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 is restarted. On the other hand, at this time, the LED in the sub-first variable display 81 and the LED in the sub-first hold display 83 are maintained in the off state. At this time, the image 72 being restored is displayed. The image 72 during restoration is an image notifying that the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being restored. In the illustrated example, the text "recovering" is displayed as the recovering image 72.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (8), the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is restarted. In addition, the sub-first hold display 83 displays "3".
Then, with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 67 (9), the number "123", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. The number "123" is a number displayed according to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off. Further, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. At this time, the combination "123" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are displayed again. Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the three reserved images 52 is restarted. This rotation effect is restarted from the state in which the glossy images 52A of the three reserved images 52 are all located at the initial positions. Further, the rotation cycle in this rotation effect is the same as the rotation cycle in the rotation effect performed before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation control unit 233 performs cycle variation in the first cycle as the variation display of the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol. Further, the effect control unit 300 can display the hold image 52 in the second cycle. And the time is different between the first cycle and the second cycle.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol and the operation display of the reserved image 52 are linked, and to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 displays the operation of the hold image 52 after the cycle display of the special symbol is started when the power is restored after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. It is feasible.
In this case, the player may mistakenly recognize that the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol has been started by executing the operation display of the reserved image 52 even before the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started after the power is restored. Can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, a modified example of the effect in the above-mentioned variable effect example will be described.
In the above-mentioned variation effect example, it has been described that the hold image 52 moves from the lower side to the upper side of the hold pedestal as the display operation effect (see FIG. 49 (19)). The motion effect is not limited to the above-mentioned effect mode.

For example, when the number of reserved images is added, as a display operation effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), an effect of gradually enlarging the third reserved image 52 newly displayed by a small display size is performed. You may be broken. Then, when the display operation effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the newly displayed third reserved image 52 is displayed in the same display size as the already displayed reserved image 52. You may do it.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, another modification (modification 2) of the effect in the above-mentioned variation effect example will be described.
In the above-mentioned variation effect example, the operation display of the already displayed hold image 52 and the operation display of the newly displayed hold image 52 are synchronized with each other at the timing when the hold image 52 is newly displayed (FIG. 49 (FIG. 49). 20) It has been explained that (see), but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (1), when the third reserved image 52 is newly displayed, the glossy image 52A is in the initial position regardless of the position of the glossy image 52A in the already displayed reserved image 52. The third reserved image 52 may be displayed while being located at. Then, the rotation effect of the newly displayed third reserved image 52 is started, but the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image is reserved with the glossy image 52A of the already displayed reserved image 52. The positions of the images 52 in the rotation direction are not aligned. That is, at the timing when the reserved image 52 is newly displayed, the operation display of the reserved image 52 that has already been displayed and the operation display of the newly displayed reserved image 52 are not synchronized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (2), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. At this time, the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51, the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52, and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 are all located at the initial positions. On the other hand, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is located at a non-initial position.

Then, along with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. Further, at this time, any rotation effect of the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is rotated with the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52. The positions in the direction are not aligned.

Next, a stop / non-display effect is performed, and as shown in FIG. 69 (4), the variable image 51 is hidden. Further, at this time, any rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is continuously performed. Further, at this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is not aligned with the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 and the glossy image 52A of the second reserved image 52 in the rotation direction.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (5), any rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is interrupted. At this time, as the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52, the reserved image 52 in which the glossy image 52A is located at the initial position is displayed.

Then, when the number of reservations for winning the prize in the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (6), the shift effect is started, and the rotation effect of the first reserved image 52, the second reserved image 52, and the third reserved image 52 is restarted. At this time, the glossy image 52A of the third reserved image 52 is aligned with the glossy image 52A of the first reserved image 52 in the rotation direction. That is, at this timing, the operation display of the first reserved image 52 and the operation display of the third reserved image 52 are synchronized. As described above, the timing at which the already displayed operation display of the reserved image 52 and the newly displayed operation display of the reserved image 52 are synchronized is not limited to the timing at which the reserved image 52 is newly displayed.

(Modification 3)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect in the variable effect example.
Next, another modification (modification 3) of the effect in the above-mentioned variation effect example will be described.
In the above-mentioned variation effect example, it has been explained that the operation display of the hold image 52 is not displayed when the operation effect of the hold image 52 is interrupted (see FIG. 47 (12)), but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 70 (1), even after the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, the stop / non-display effect ends, and the variable image 51 is hidden, the rotation effect of the hold image 52 is continuously performed. ing.
Next, when the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is subtracted and the variation display of the next special symbol is started, the variation display of the small symbol 56 starts as shown in FIG. 70 (2). Will be done. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "3" to "2". Further, at this time, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (3), the shift effect is started. In the illustrated example, as the shift effect, the hold image 52 is moved while rotating in a direction different from the rotation direction in the rotation effect. During the execution of this shift effect, the rotation effect of the reserved image 52 is interrupted.
Then, when the shift effect is completed, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 is restarted. In this case, the rotation effect is restarted from the state where the glossy image 51A of the variable image 51 and the glossy image 52A of the reserved image 52 are both located at the initial positions. As described above, when the operation effect of the hold image 52 is interrupted, the hold image 52 may be displayed in an operation mode different from that of the operation effect.

(Modification example 4)
71 and 72 are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect in the variation effect example.
Next, another modification (modification 4) of the effect in the above-mentioned variation effect example will be described.
In the above-mentioned variation effect example, it is explained that the operation cycle in the operation effect is the same before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (1), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed. At this time, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is performed. The rotation cycle in this rotation effect is, for example, 2 seconds.

Next, by performing the hold change effect, the display mode of the third hold image 52 changes from the normal display mode to the blinking display mode. The third reserved image 52, which is displayed according to the blinking display mode, performs a rotation effect and a blinking effect.
As an example of the operation effect, the blinking effect is a lighting state in which the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 appear to be lit (see FIG. 71 (2)) and a lighting state in which the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 appear to be off (FIG. 71). (Refer to 3)) is an effect that is repeated alternately. In the blinking effect, the time from the lighting state to the lighting state of the holding image 52 from the lighting state to the lighting state again, that is, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is, for example, 0.5 seconds. That is, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is shorter than the rotation cycle in the rotation effect. Further, the display in the blinking effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is an example of the operation display. That is, the "operation display" includes not only the display in which the display area of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 changes with the passage of time, but also the variable image 51 or the reserved image 51 in the predetermined display area as in the display in the blinking effect. A display in which the display mode of the image 52 changes with the passage of time is also included.

Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 71 (4). At this time, the LED on the sub-first variable display 81 and the LED on the sub-first hold display 83 are turned off.
Next, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the image 72 being restored is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (5). Further, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is restarted. In addition, the sub-first hold display 83 displays "3".

Then, with the stop display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 71 (6), the number "123", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol. At this time, the three reserved images 52 are displayed again. At this time, the third reserved image 52 displayed by the blinking display mode is in the lit state. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

Then, the number of reservations for winning the prize in the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and the variation display of the next special symbol is started. After that, when the shift effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (7), the variable image 51, the first reserved image 52, and the second reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is started. In addition, the rotation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 is performed. The rotation cycle in this rotation effect is 2 seconds. In addition, the blinking effect of the second reserved image 52 is performed. The blinking cycle in this blinking effect is, for example, 2 seconds. That is, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is longer than before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. Further, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is started. In addition, the sub-first hold display 83 "2" is displayed.

As described above, in the modified example 4, the effect control unit 300 operates in the operation effect after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off, as compared with before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. The cycle of is lengthened.
The player may be able to resume the game after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, but the player may feel anxious about the pachinko gaming machine 100 being turned off. In this case, if the motion cycle in the motion staging is shortened to incite the player, the player's anxiety may increase. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off, the game is restarted by lengthening the cycle of the motion in the motion effect and limiting the effect of inciting the player. It suppresses the increase of anxiety of the person.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the operation effect before starting the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 46 (3)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the operation effect when the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started. Further, the operation effect may be started after the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the operation effect after starting the variation display of the small symbol 56 (see FIG. 46 (3)), but the variation display of the small symbol 56 is started. You may start the motion effect when you do.
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the operation effect after updating the display content of the hold number display 55 according to the decrease in the hold number (see FIG. 46 (3)). The operation effect may be started when the display content of the hold number display 55 is updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 300 newly displays the hold image 52, when the increase display effect ends, the operation effect of the newly displayed hold image 52 is started (FIG. 49 (FIG. 49). 20), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the effect control unit 300 newly displays the hold image 52, the effect effect of the newly displayed hold image 52 may be started while the increase display effect is being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 has described that the operation effect is interrupted after the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped (see FIG. 47 (12)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the operation effect when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped. Further, the operation effect may be interrupted before the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 interrupts the operation effect after the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 47 (12)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the operation effect when the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. Further, the operation effect may be interrupted before the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 interrupts the operation effect of the hold image 52 after hiding the variable image 51 (see FIG. 47 (12)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the operation effect of the hold image 52 when the variable image 51 is hidden. Further, the operation effect of the reserved image 52 may be interrupted before the variable image 51 is hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 interrupts the operation effect of the reserved image 52 before starting the shift effect (see FIG. 47 (12)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may interrupt the operation effect of the hold image 52 when starting the shift effect. Further, the operation effect of the reserved image 52 may be interrupted during the execution of the shift effect. Further, the operation effect of the reserved image 52 may be interrupted when the shift effect is finished. Further, the operation effect of the reserved image 52 may be interrupted after the shift effect is finished.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the shift effect before starting the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 46 (3)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the shift effect when the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started. Further, the shift effect may be started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation effect of the hold image 52 may not be performed from the time when the operation effect of the hold image 52 is interrupted to the time when the operation effect of the hold image 52 is resumed (see FIG. 47 (12)). Not limited.
As an example, the effect control unit 300 interrupts the operation effect that was being executed for the displayed hold image 52, and at the same time, starts the rotation effect from the state where the hold image 52 is located at the initial position. You may. That is, the "interruption" of the operation display of the hold image 52 may be any time as long as the periodic operation display that was in progress is interrupted in the middle, and is suspended from the interruption of the operation effect of the hold image 52 to the restart. It is not necessary that the operation effect of the image 52 is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 ends the operation effect of the variable image 51 after starting the stop / non-display effect (see FIG. 47 (11)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may end the operation effect of the variable image 51 when the stop / non-display effect is started. Further, the operation effect of the variable image 51 may be ended before the stop / non-display effect is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 changes the transparency of the variable image 51 in the stop / non-display effect (see FIG. 47 (10)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may hide the variable image 51 after gradually reducing the display size of the variable image 51 in the stop / non-display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, one reserved image 52 having different display modes and the other reserved image 52 (see FIG. 48 (17)) have a cycle of some operations (for example, rotation in each other's rotation effect). Explained that they are the same, but not limited to this. One reserved image 52 and another reserved image 52 having different display modes may not perform the same operation in the operation effect.

Further, the timing at which the effect control unit 300 synchronizes the operation displays of the plurality of reserved images 52 is not limited to each of the above-mentioned examples.
An example of the timing at which the effect control unit 300 synchronizes the operation displays of the plurality of reserved images 52 will be described. When one reserved image 52 during execution of the operation effect is located at a non-initial position, another reserved image 52 may be newly displayed in a state of being positioned at the initial position. In this case, the newly displayed other reserved image 52 does not perform the operation effect until the already displayed reserved image 52 reaches the initial position. Then, at the timing when the already displayed one reserved image 52 reaches the initial position, the newly displayed other reserved image 52 performs an operation effect together with the already displayed one reserved image 52. In this way, the operation display of the newly displayed other reserved image 52 may be synchronized with the operation display of the one reserved image 52 that has already been displayed.
Further, for example, the effect control unit 300 may synchronize the operation display of the newly displayed hold image 52 with the operation display of the already displayed hold image 52 during the execution of the increase display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the SP start / non-display effect when the transition image 64 is displayed (see FIG. 54 (2)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the SP start / non-display effect before displaying the transition image 64. Further, the SP start / non-display effect may be started after the transition image 64 is displayed. Further, the SP start non-display effect may be started when the SP reach effect is started. Further, the SP start non-display effect may be started after the start of the SP reach effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in the SP reach effect so that the player cannot visually recognize the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. , Not limited to this.
The staging control unit 300 displays, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 on a layer lower than the layer on which the SP image 65 and the transition image 64 are displayed among the plurality of layers of the image display unit 114. , The visual recognition of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 by the player may be restricted. The lower layer is a layer on the rear side when the player views the pachinko gaming machine 100 from the front. Further, in the SP reach effect, the effect control unit 300 may continuously perform the operation effect of the variable image 51 and the hold image 52. In this case, when the SP image 65 and the transition image 64 are hidden so that the player can visually recognize the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are positioned at the non-initial position. I have something to do. That is, when the player can see the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 again after the end of the SP reach effect, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 do not have to be located at the initial position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 hides (hides) the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 while the transition image 64 is displayed (see FIG. 54 (3)). , Not limited to this.
For example, the staging control unit 300 may make the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 invisible (non-display) to the player before displaying the transition image 64. Further, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be visible (hidden) by the player when the SP reach effect is started. Further, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be visible (hidden) by the player after the start of the SP reach effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 when performing the SP reach effect (see FIG. 54 (4)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when performing the SP reach effect, the reserved image 52 may be hidden while the variable image 51 may not be hidden. Further, when performing the SP reach effect, the variable image 51 may be hidden while the reserved image 52 may not be hidden. Further, when performing the SP reach effect, neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 may be hidden. In this case, the operation effect of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 that are not hidden may be continuously performed. That is, when the effect control unit 300 executes the specific effect, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 may be changed, but the operation display of the information display may not be changed. In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner while paying attention to the specific effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the SP end display effect when the transition image 64 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (7)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the SP end display effect after displaying the transition image 64. Further, the SP end display effect may be started when the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is displayed after the transition image 64 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (9)).

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the staging control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in an opaque display mode after displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 55 (8)). Not limited to this.
For example, the staging control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in an opaque display mode when displaying the transition image 64.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 300 first displays the doublet decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (see FIG. 56 (3)). The variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 when the decorative symbol 41 of doublet is first displayed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Then, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden when the promotion effect is being executed (see FIG. 56 (4)). Further, for example, in a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not hidden until the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, and the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped. The image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 hides the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 while executing the revival effect (see FIG. 59 (8)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the effect control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 when the revival effect is being executed, and then displays the decorative symbol 41 of doublet eyes (see FIG. 59 (9)). , The variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden. Further, for example, when the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not hidden during and after the execution of the revival effect, and then the promotion effect is executed (see FIG. 59 (10)), the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. It may be hidden. Further, for example, even when the revival effect is executed, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not hidden until the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, and the variable image 51 and the variable image 51 are not hidden when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped. The reserved image 52 may be hidden. Further, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden during the execution of the resurrection effect, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be displayed again after the end of the resurrection effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 does not hide the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 when the SP reach effect is not performed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (FIG. FIG. 61 (see)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the staging control unit 300 does not hide the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 at the timing of first displaying the doublet decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 61 (3)), and then the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. 52 may be hidden. Further, for example, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may not be hidden until the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, and the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be hidden when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off, the effect control unit 300 starts displaying the image 72 being restored, and then the variation display on the sub first variation display 81. (See FIG. 67 (8)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the staging control unit 300 may start displaying the image 72 being restored after restarting the variation display on the sub-first variation indicator 81. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off, the number of holdings on the sub-first holding indicator 83 after the effect control unit 300 starts displaying the restoration image 72. Although it has been explained that the display of the above is resumed (see FIG. 67 (8)), the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the staging control unit 300 starts displaying the image 72 being restored after resuming the display of the number of holdes on the sub-first hold indicator 83. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the effect control unit 300 is restored after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the blinking cycle in the blinking effect is compared with that before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. Explained to lengthen. Here, the above-mentioned example is an effect mode for making the operation cycle in the operation effect longer than before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power is cut off. Not limited to.
For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off while the blinking effect is performed with the blinking cycle of 0.5 seconds by the hold image 52 which is the blinking display mode, the blinking display mode is displayed. Instead of the reserved image 52, the reserved image 52 in the normal display mode may be displayed. After that, the reserved image 52 in this normal display mode performs an operation effect in which the operation cycle is 2 seconds. In this way, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then restored, the cycle of the operation in the operation effect may be longer than before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect control unit 300 starts the enlargement effect during the execution of the shift effect (see FIG. 46 (4)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may start the enlargement effect when the shift effect is started. Further, the enlargement effect may be finished before the shift effect is finished.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 moves the reserved image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 in the shift effect, and changes one reserved image 52 to the display area of the other reserved image 52. It is the same as the movement mode when moving to, but is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 moves the operation of the hold image 52 when moving the hold image 52 to the display area of the variable image 51 in the shift effect, and moves one hold image 52 to the display area of the other hold image 52. It may be different from the operation of one reserved image 52 at the time of making the image 52. Further, in the shift effect, the moving direction of the reserved image 52 when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the variable image 51 is one when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the other reserved image 52. It may be different from the moving direction of the reserved image 52. That is, in the shift effect, the movement mode when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the variable image 51 is different from the movement mode when the reserved image 52 is moved to the display area of the other reserved image 52. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 moves the hold image 52 in a display mode that is opaque in the shift effect (see FIG. 46 (3)), but the hold image 52 is translucent in the shift effect. It may be moved according to a certain display mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 hides the decorative symbol 41 when displaying the transition image 64 (see FIG. 54 (2)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the staging control unit 300 may display the decorative symbol 41 in a mode with low decorativeness and with a reduced display size while displaying the transition image 64.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 sets the operation of the variable image 51 in the operation effect to be the same as the operation of the hold image 52 in the operation effect, but the operation is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may make the operation of the variable image 51 in the operation effect different from the operation of the hold image 52 in the operation effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 variably displays the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 46 (5)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may variablely display the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 by horizontal scrolling (scrolling in the left-right direction). Further, the staging control unit 300 may change the display by updating the numbers displayed as the decorative symbol 41 or the small symbol 56 without scrolling the decorative symbol 41 or the small symbol 56. The switching display of the small symbol 56 includes a variable display in which the small symbol 56 is scrolled and a display in which the number displayed as the small symbol 56 is updated without scrolling the small symbol 56.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 in different shapes for each game state and stage.
Here, the effect control unit 300 may display the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which are display modes different from the normal display mode, in a common mode regardless of the gaming state or the stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 sets the start timing of the hold change effect to the timing at which the hold image 52 is located at the initial position (see FIG. 48 (16)), but the present invention is not limited to this. .. The effect control unit 300 may set the start timing of the hold change effect to the timing when the hold image 52 is a specific operation mode in the operation effect, and may not be the timing when the hold image 52 is located at the initial position. .. Further, the effect control unit 300 may start the hold change effect regardless of which mode is the operation mode in the operation effect of the hold image 52.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which are display modes different from the normal display mode, by executing the hold change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..
For example, the staging control unit 300 may newly display the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode, depending on the addition of the number of reserved images. That is, the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode, may be displayed without performing the hold change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 300 newly displays the reserved image 52, the newly displayed reserved image 52 is gradually changed from a display mode having high transparency to a display mode having low transparency. It is changing (see FIG. 49 (19)), but is not limited to this.
For example, if the number of holds is 0 and the number of holds is added during the stop display of the special symbol, the effect control unit 300 may display the hold image 52 while gradually changing the transparency. Instead, it may be displayed according to a display mode that is opaque. Further, when the number of hold is 0 and the number of hold is added during the stop display of the special symbol, the mode of movement of the hold image 52 in the shift effect is added when the number of hold is not 0. It may be different from the case where it was done. Further, when the number of holdings is 0 and the number of holdings is added during the stop display of the special symbol, the display mode of the number of holdings display 55 may be changed to "1" and then switched to "0". The display mode of the hold number display 55 may be left as "0".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold number is added, the effect control unit 300 updates the display content of the hold number display 55 and newly displays the hold image 52 (see FIG. 49 (19)). ), But is not limited to this.
For example, when the hold number is added, the effect control unit 300 may first update the display content of the hold number display 55, and then start a new display of the hold image 52.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 changes the display mode of the hold image 52 by changing the transparency of the hold image 52 in the increase display effect (see FIG. 49 (19)). Not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may change the display mode of the hold image 52 by gradually changing the shape of the hold image 52 in the increase display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the staging control unit 300 uses the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 to perform cycle display and stop display of the symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control unit 300 may perform cycle display and stop display of the symbol on the image display unit 114. In this case, the symbol whose cycle display and stop display are performed on the image display unit 114 is regarded as a special symbol.

[Second Embodiment]
(Display example of special symbol display)
A display example of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol display 222) will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

As shown in FIG. 73A, the special symbol display shows a lost special symbol in which the LED at the right end is lit as the first display mode after the power is turned on.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the display mode is such that the two LEDs are lit from the left end, and after that (after 32 ms), FIGS. 73 (c) to (h). ), The lighting position of the LED changes every 32 ms. Specifically, control is performed to turn on the corresponding LED every 4 ms, which is the cycle of timer interruption, and by continuing this for 8 times of timer interrupt, the same LED is turned on for 32 ms.

Then, cycle fluctuations are performed a plurality of times with the change in the display mode of FIGS. 73 (b) to (h) as one cycle (= 256 ms), and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, FIGS. 73 (i) to (l). ) (Loss special symbol, 1st jackpot special symbol, 2nd jackpot special symbol, 3rd jackpot special symbol) is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds).

Further, when the variation display of the next special symbol is started after the stop time has elapsed, the cycle variation is performed a plurality of times from the display mode of FIG. 73 (b), and any one of FIGS. 73 (i) to (l). The special symbol of is stopped and displayed for a stop time (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

In the cycle fluctuation, two LEDs are turned on and the lighting position is changed (moved). However, one LED may be turned on and the lighting position may be changed, or three or more LEDs may be turned on. The LED may be turned on and the lighting position may be changed.

Further, in the cycle variation, eight types of display modes are set as one cycle, but two types of display modes (for example, all lighting and all turning off) may be set as one cycle, and three or more types of display modes may be set as one cycle. May be good. Even in this case, it is preferable that the time of one cycle is shorter than the stop time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds = 500 ms).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the variable winning portion is opened for 1.8 seconds is not executed, but in the case of executing the small hit game, after performing the cycle fluctuation a plurality of times. It is advisable to stop and display the small hit special symbol. In this case, the stop time of the small hit special symbol may be shorter than 0.5 seconds (500 ms) or the display time (32 ms) of one display mode in the cycle variation.

(Example of production for each production mode)
An example of a display effect for each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

In the effect mode A (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, numerical image SG surrounded by a circle image), and the small symbol 56 is in a common mode (numerical image) common to all production modes. Is displayed.

Then, the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.75 seconds. This pre-variation motion of the decorative symbol 41 can also be regarded as a start motion effect performed when the scroll display is started.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first mode (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first aspect causes the image display unit 114 to perform a shaking motion (directing motion) that becomes the first posture again from the first posture tilted to the left (initial posture) via the second posture tilted to the right. During the display, it is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In the effect mode B (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, numerical image SG surrounded by a circle image), and the small symbol 56 is a common mode (numerical image) common to all the production modes. Is displayed.

The decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed as a pre-variation operation before the scroll display (update operation) is started. Is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle type). Then, the normal icon of the second aspect causes the image display unit 114 to perform a shaking motion (directing motion) that becomes the first posture again from the first posture tilted to the left (initial posture) via the second posture tilted to the right. During the display, it is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds.

In the effect mode C (normal game state), as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode (R-chafted rectangular base image BG, character image CG, numerical image SG surrounded by a circle image of the pattern background), and the small symbol 56 is common to all the production modes. It is displayed in a common mode (numerical image).

The decorative symbol 41 of the third aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the decorative symbol 41 is enlarged and displayed as a pre-variation operation before the scroll display (update variation) is started. Is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the specific top moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114.

In the effect mode D (probability change game state), as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the mode D background image is always displayed in a side-scrolling or scene change (effect operation) state while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image BG, numerical image SG), and the small symbol 56 is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the staging modes.

Then, the decorative symbol 41 of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black dot is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the black dot moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114.

In the effect mode E (probability change game state), as shown in FIG. 74 (e), the mode E background image is always displayed in a side-scrolling or scene change (effect operation) state while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image BG, numerical image SG), and the small symbol 56 is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the staging modes.

Then, the decorative symbol 41 of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, and rises upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. The display is designed to be performed for 0.4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black dot is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the black dot moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114.

In the effect mode F (time saving game state), as shown in FIG. 74 (f), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or a scene change (effect operation) while being displayed on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode (rectangular base image BG, numerical image SG), and the small symbol 56 is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all the staging modes.

Then, the decorative symbol 41 of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in the variation effect, but the reduced display of the decorative symbol 41 is 0 as a pre-variation operation suggesting that the scroll display starts. It is designed to last for 4 seconds.

Further, in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth mode (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the upper part, and returns to the first posture via the second posture in which the specific top moves (directing). Operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114.

It should be noted that an operation different from the above-mentioned pre-variation operation may be performed. For example, the decorative symbol 41 may be rotated by the decorative symbol 41 as a pre-variation operation that suggests that the scroll display starts.

Further, in the effect modes A to F, when the special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C), the special icon is a common mode common to all the effect modes (the second hold icon display area 70D, the icon display area 70C). It is displayed as a circle). Then, the special icon of the common mode is a rotation operation (directing operation) in which the specific part rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the upper part and becomes the first posture again via the second posture in which the specific part moves. ) Is always repeated in one cycle of 2.5 seconds while being displayed on the image display unit 114.

Further, in the effect modes A to F, the small symbol 56 displayed in the common mode (numerical image) is scrolled downward (update variation) without performing the pre-variation operation in the variation effect. Therefore, the update operation of repeatedly updating the numerical images 1 to 9 is repeated in one cycle of 0.9 seconds. As for the small symbol 56, it is suggested that the variation effect is being executed by performing the update variation.

In this way, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) of the hold icon is performed by the LED on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). It is repeatedly executed in a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the change cycle (32 ms) of the lighting mode or the cycle of one cycle (256 ms). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing the effect operation, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

Further, the effect of changing between the first posture and the second posture in the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) of the hold icon is performed by the blinking cycle of the LED on the sub first fluctuation display 81 (sub second fluctuation display 82). It is designed to be repeatedly executed in a cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from (1 second). Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the hold icon is performing the effect operation, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

Further, in the variation effect, the decorative symbol 41 is configured to execute any of a plurality of types of pre-variation operations (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display). Therefore, the effect of the variable effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the time until the decorative symbol 41 performs the scroll display (update variation) differs depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect. There are cases. Therefore, the effect of the variable effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, regardless of which of the plurality of types of pre-variation movements (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update) of the three decorative symbols 41 are performed. The start order of (variation) may be the same (left → middle → right).

Further, depending on which of the plurality of types of pre-variation movements (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) is executed by the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect, the pre-variation operation and scroll display (update variation) of the three decorative symbols 41 are performed. The start order may be different (floating display: left → middle → right, enlarged display: middle → left → right, reduced display: right → middle → left, etc.).

Further, a plurality of types of pre-variation operation modes of the decorative symbol 41 may be provided for each effect mode so that the jackpot expectation degree is different. Even in this case, the operation mode of the hold icon may be one type for each effect mode so as not to have a big hit expectation.

(Example of displaying the number of pending items)
An example of displaying the number of holdings in the image display unit 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

First, when the number of holds is "0" and the customer is waiting, no icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C as shown in FIG. 75 (a), and the first start port. "0" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122, respectively.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 and the first holding number becomes "1", it is normally displayed on the first display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The hold icon HI of the embodiment is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animation of one frame, and the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is updated (increased display) to "1" in a non-animation of one frame. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the staging operation (swaying operation) is started from there.

Then, when the number of first hold is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the hold displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is as shown in FIG. 75 (c). A 20-frame animation that shifts the icon HI toward the icon display area 70C (decrease display, change display) is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 is set to "0" by 1 frame non-animation. It is updated (decreased display). At this time, the hold icon HI changes from opaque to transparent and is displayed semi-transparently, but the staging operation (shaking operation) is continuously performed.

After that, when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), the hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the hold icon HI and is opaque, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is performed. ) Is continued.

In this state, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 and the first holding number becomes "1", as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the first display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B is displayed. An animation of 20 frames in which the hold icon HI of the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is updated to "1" (increased display) with one frame of non-animation. Will be done. At this time, the hold icon HI that is additionally displayed starts an effect operation (swaying operation) so as to synchronize with an icon of another normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is translucently minimized with an effect image. It is enlarged from the size to the normal size. That is, in the state where the special symbol is variablely displayed, the hold icon HI may not be displayed from the first posture (initial posture).

Then, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the hold icon HI in the additionally displayed normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque as shown in FIG. 75 (f). And the staging operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, the first holding number becomes "2", and it is determined that the icon change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 75 (g). A 20-frame animation in which the hold icon HI of the first special display mode (blue) is additionally displayed (increased display) is started in the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the number of holds of the first start port 121 is started. The display 55 is updated (increased) to "2" with one frame of non-animation. At this time, the hold icon HI additionally displayed has an effect operation (rotational operation) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the upper part. It starts and is magnified from the semi-transparent tiny size to the normal size with the effect image.

Then, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI of the first special display mode (blue) is completed, the hold icon of the first special display mode (blue) additionally displayed is as shown in FIG. 75 (h). The HI is of normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the staging operation (rotational operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 75 (i), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. The animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with the effect image gradually increasing in transparency, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is performed even during the erase display.

After that, when the number of the first hold is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, it is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. 75 (j). A 20-frame animation that shifts (decreases) one hold icon HI toward the icon display area 70C is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "1" with one frame of non-animation. (Reduced display). At this time, the two hold icons HI are displayed semi-transparently with the transparency changing from opaque, but the staging operation (swaying operation, rotating operation) is continuously performed.

Then, when the shift display of the two hold icon HIs is completed, as shown in FIG. 75 (k), the hold icon HI of the normal display mode displayed in the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B is concerned. The icon TI has a size larger than that of the hold icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the effect operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed. Further, the hold icon HI of the first special display mode displayed on the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed on the first display portion in a normal size and opaquely, and the icon changes accordingly. The effect changes to the second special display mode (a type of special icon), but the effect operation (rotational operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 and the first holding number becomes "2", as shown in FIG. 75 (l), the second display portion of the first holding icon display area 70B is displayed. An animation of 20 frames in which the hold icon HI of the normal display mode is additionally displayed (increased display) is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is updated to "2" (increased display) with 1 frame of non-animation. Will be done. At this time, the hold icon HI that is additionally displayed starts an effect operation (swaying operation) so as to synchronize with an icon of another normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is translucently minimized with an effect image. It is enlarged from the size to the normal size.

After that, when the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the hold icon HI in the additionally displayed normal display mode is displayed in normal size and opaque as shown in FIG. 75 (m). And the staging operation (swaying operation) is continuously performed.

In this state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display is stopped, as shown in FIG. 75 (n), the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased and displayed in 20 frames. The animation starts. At this time, the icon TI that is erased and displayed is erased with the effect image gradually increasing in transparency, but the effect operation (shaking operation) is performed even during the erase display.

After that, when the number of the first hold is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the effect displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B as shown in FIG. 75 (o). A 20-frame animation that shifts (decreases) the two operating hold icon HIs toward the icon display area 70C is started, and the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is a non-animation of one frame. 1 ”is updated (decreased display). At this time, the two hold icons HI are displayed semi-transparently with the transparency changing from opaque, but the staging operation (swaying operation, rotating operation) is continuously performed.

At this time, if the condition for switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 75 (p), the image display unit 114 has a shield image (blackout image, whiteout image) on the entire screen. Etc.) are displayed, and the icons of the first hold icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed while the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 are visible. Visibility is restricted.

Then, in the rear layer of the shielded image, as shown in FIG. 75 (q), the hold icon HI is normally displayed corresponding to the effect mode B while the display mode and the effect operation (rotation operation) of the icon TI are maintained. It is switched to the hold icon HI of the mode. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the staging operation (swaying operation) is started from there.

Then, when the shielded image is erased, as shown in FIG. 75 (r), the hold icon HI of the normal display mode displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon HI displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI in the special display mode can be visually recognized.

Even when a plurality of hold icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display is performed in the same manner as when the effect operation is performed so that the hold icon in the normal display mode and the icon in the normal display mode are synchronized with each other. The effect operation is performed so that the plurality of hold icons of the mode are synchronized.

Further, although the hold display example in the effect mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode of the hold icon and the operation effect mode are different in the other effect modes, and basically the same number of hold displays (effect) is displayed. (Including the display when switching modes) will be performed.

The first feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that when the number of holds increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold number display 55 and the hold icon are displayed. One point is that it is executed in the period of one frame that minimizes the increase display by non-animation. By doing so, it is possible to immediately perform a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number display 55 and decrease display of the hold icon) so as not to be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the production examples of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that when the number of holds is reduced (changes from "1" to "0"), the number of holds display 55 is reduced by non-animation (1 frame). The point is that the display and the change display (decrease display) by the animation (20 frames) of the hold icon to the icon are executed (started at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the timing at which the decrease display of the hold number display 55 starts (frame update timing) rather than the timing at which the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) starts (frame update timing). ) May come first (for example, one frame before).

The third feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is the timing (frame update timing) at which the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the icon) is completed. However, the timing at which the reduction display of the hold number display 55 is completed (frame update timing) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy for the player to grasp that the number of holds has decreased by the hold number display 55 while producing a change in the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the timing at which the decrease display of the hold number display 55 is completed (frame update timing) rather than the timing at which the change display of the hold icon to the icon (shift display of the hold icon to the icon) is completed (frame update timing). May come first (for example, one frame before).

The fourth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that when the number of holdings increases during the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings display 55 is increased by non-animation (1 frame), and the number of holdings is increased. The point is that the increase display by the animation (20 frames) of the hold icon is executed (starts at the same frame update timing). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the timing at which the increase display of the hold number display 55 starts (frame update timing) and the timing at which the increase display ends (frame update timing) precedes the timing at which the increase display of the hold icon starts (frame update timing) (for example, 1). It may be before the frame).

The fifth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that the increase display of the hold number display 55 is completed rather than the timing (frame update timing) when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon is completed. There is a point that the timing to be done (frame update timing) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy for the player to grasp that the number of holds has increased by the hold number display 55 while producing a change in the number of holds, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that when the number of holds increases during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol, the number of holds increases while the customer is waiting. Therefore, the additional display (increased display) of the hold icon is executed for a long period (long number of frames). By doing so, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is the effect operation mode (operation while enlarging) at the start (display start) of the increase display of the hold icon, and the completion (display) of the increase display of the hold icon. There is a point that it is different (partially different) from the effect operation mode (operation while maintaining the size) after the start). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that not only a part of the operations may be different but all the operations may be different between the start of the increase display of the hold icon and the completion of the increase display.

The eighth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is a display mode (semi-transparent) at the start of the increase display of the hold icon and a display mode (opaque) after the completion of the increase display of the hold icon. There are some differences (some are different). By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that not only the transparency but also the shape and the like may be different between the start of the increase display of the hold icon and the completion of the increase display.

The ninth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is the effect operation in which the hold icon and the icon are repeatedly changed into the first posture and the second posture during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol). It is possible to perform shaking motion, rotation motion, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by the hold icon and the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that the hold icon and the effect operation (swaying operation, rotation operation) in which the icon repeatedly changes between the first posture and the second posture are performed from the first posture. The point that the time for changing to the second posture is constant each time is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the hold icon and the icon becoming difficult to see, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. If the hold icon and the icon change from the first posture to the second posture and the control load of the drawing process is large and the processing fails (drawing for one frame could not be performed), the drawing process is started from the first posture. The time for changing to the second posture is not constant but substantially constant only at that time.

The eleventh feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is a plurality of icons (hold icons, hold icon and the icon) displayed in the normal display mode during the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol. The point is that the effect operation is executed in synchronization with each other. By doing so, it is possible to improve the appearance of the effect of the icon and improve the effect of the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The timing at which the effect operation of the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode based on the new start prize is synchronized with the effect operation of the other hold icon may be at the start of the display, or a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. It may be time, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display.

The twelfth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, the icon is erased and displayed, but after the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, the next The hold icon has a point that the effect operation is repeatedly executed until the variation display (variation effect) is started. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the number of holds is not "0" by the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that the transparency of the decorative symbol does not change when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the icon is erased after the transparency of the icon becomes high. There are some points. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the discomfort when erasing the icon and to erase the icon naturally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75, the time (scale) of one cycle of the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon) is the first effect mode and the second effect mode (effect). It can be mentioned that the mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect modes C to F are the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to see the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75, the cycle in which the hold icon (the icon) changes from the first posture to the first posture again via the second posture is defined as the first effect mode. The point that it is the same as the second effect mode (between the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect modes C to F) can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to see the effect operation of the hold icon (the icon), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that the size (area) of the area where the number of holds is displayed does not change due to the increase or decrease of the number of holds in the hold number display area, but in the hold icon display area. The size (area) of the area where the hold icon is displayed changes depending on the increase or decrease in the number of holds (when the number of holds is singular, the hold icon is displayed in the first area, and when the number of holds is multiple. The hold icon is displayed in the second area, which is larger than the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the increase / decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventeenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75, the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode (normal icon) performs an effect operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture in the first cycle. The hold icon that can be repeatedly executed in (2 seconds or 3 seconds) and is displayed in the special display mode (special icon) with a higher expectation of big hit than the normal display mode changes between the first posture and the second posture. It is possible to repeatedly execute the effect operation to be performed in the second cycle (2.5 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it becomes easy to distinguish between the hold icon in the normal display mode and the hold icon in the special display mode, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature according to the production example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is that the small symbol executes the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) from 1 to 9 of the numerical image in the first cycle (0.9 seconds). It is possible, and the hold icon has a point that the staging operation that changes between the first posture and the second posture can be executed in the second cycle (2 seconds or 3 seconds) different from the first cycle. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the update fluctuation of the small symbol and the effect operation of the hold icon are linked, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75, a decrease display of the number of holds is performed with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the hold displayed in the hold number display area in this decrease display is performed. The number display 55 does not move, but the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area moves (before the number of holds decreases, the hold icon is displayed in the second area, which is larger than the first area, and the number of holds is After the decrease, the hold icon is displayed in the first area). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the decrease in the number of reservations while recognizing the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature according to the effect example of FIGS. 74 to 75 is a moving direction (downward) in the update operation of the decorative symbol (small symbol) and an operation direction (horizontal direction) in the effect operation (swaying operation) of the hold icon. Etc.) and different points. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish and recognize the update fluctuation of the decorative symbol (small symbol) and the staging operation (swaying motion) of the hold icon, and it is possible to enhance the staging effect in the fluctuating production. It will be possible to improve.

When the number of holds increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold icon is displayed in an increased manner with one frame of non-animation. The increase display may be performed by animation of a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue longer than the increase display. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold icon is set to perform the effect operation even while the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, but the hold icon stops the effect operation while the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the effect operation is performed. The effect operation of the hold icon may be restarted after the shift display of the hold icon accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol (decrease in the number of holds). By doing so, it is possible to make the player know whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner depending on the presence or absence of the effect operation of the hold icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the effect operation of the hold icon is restarted after the shift display of the hold icon, the hold icon may resume the effect operation from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (hold icon display area, the icon display area). good. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the variable display of the special symbol has been newly started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed and the icon is erased, the icon continues to perform the effect operation, but the special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed. The operation may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load related to the display control.

In addition, although multiple icons displayed in the normal display mode (hold icons, hold icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the effect operation, the effect operation is not performed in perfect synchronization. , The staging operation may be performed substantially in synchronization. It should be noted that the timing at which the effect operation of the hold icon displayed in the normal display mode based on the new start prize is substantially synchronized with the effect operation of the other hold icon may be at the start of the display or at a predetermined time from the start of the display. It may be at the lapse of time, at the start of the shift display, or at the completion of the shift display.

(Specific example when variable staging starts from waiting for customers)
A specific example of the case where the variation effect starts from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 77 to 78 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 76. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 76, the customer waiting state in which the variation display of the special symbol has not been executed since the power was turned on, and the effect mode A and the volume value “3” are set. At this time, the first special symbol display 221 displays the lost special symbol (only the LED at the right end is lit), which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the image display unit 114 waits for the execution of the variation effect. The variable standby screen is displayed. Specifically, the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation), and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are in a state in which "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is stopped and displayed (). See FIG. 77 (a)). The mode A background image is side-scrolled from the timing when the variable standby screen is first displayed after the power is turned on.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 76, when the up button or the down button of the effect key 162 is operated for volume adjustment, a part of the image display unit 114 overlaps the front side of the right decorative symbol 41. In this way, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value “3” is displayed, and the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value “3” is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 77 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 76, when the upper button of the effect key 162 is operated to raise the volume, the volume value changes from "3" to "4". At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "4", and the speaker 156 outputs a confirmation sound (0.5 seconds) of the volume corresponding to the volume value "4". (See FIG. 77 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 76, when an operation for lowering the volume is performed by a changeover switch (not shown), the volume value changes from "4" to "3". At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value "3", but the speaker 156 responds to the volume value "3" because the volume is adjusted by the changeover switch (not shown). No confirmation sound is output (see FIG. 77 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 76, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the first hold number becomes "1" and the first special symbol hold indicator 218 displays "1", and the game A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 77 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 76, when the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, the game control unit 200 sends a start command (special symbol) to the effect control unit 300. A memory specification command, a game state specification command, a special symbol specification command, a special symbol variation pattern specification command) are transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding display 218 becomes "0" display, and the first special symbol display 221 starts the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol (FIG. 77 (f)). reference).

Further, since a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the winning command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub first hold display 83 are displayed as "1", and the first hold is displayed. The hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode is additionally displayed in the first display portion of the icon display area 70B in a non-animated manner, and the output of the first winning sound is started (see FIG. 77 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 76 (timing of the third display change in the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the start command, the first start port 121 The hold number display 55 and the sub first hold display 83 are displayed as “0”, and the change display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub first change display 81 is started (FIG. 78 (g)). reference).

Further, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. In addition, the hold icon HI starts the effect operation. Further, the decorative symbol 41 starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the small symbol 56 starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display). Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 are regulated for a predetermined period (1 second), the volume value image OG is erased, and the audible output of the variable BGM is started from the speaker 156 (FIG. 78 (g)). reference).

In addition to the start of the audible output of the variable BGM at the start of the ascending display as the pre-variation operation of the decorative symbol 41, the variation start sound (start sound output every variation, start sound as a jackpot notice, etc.) is output. You may do so.

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 76 (at the start of the third cycle fluctuation), the output of the winning sound ends (see FIG. 78 (h)), and the timing of T8 in FIG. 76 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation). ), When the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the icon TI (white icon) is displayed, and then the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 is started (see FIG. 78 (i)). It should be noted that the effect operation of the icon TI may be performed during the execution of the floating display as the pre-variation operation of the decorative symbol 41. Further, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 76, high-speed fluctuation of all the decorative symbols 41 starts (see FIG. 78 (j)). When outputting the fluctuation start sound, it is preferable to end the output of the fluctuation start sound at this timing (after the output of the winning sound ends).

If the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command during the display of the volume value image OG, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the variation effect is not executed, so that the volume value image is displayed. The display is continued without erasing the OG, and the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 is possible is maintained. Further, if the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command during the display of the volume value image OG, the display period of the volume value image OG may be extended.

Further, even when the light amount value image is displayed by operating the left button or the right button of the effect key 162 instead of the volume value image OG, it is basically the same as when the volume value image OG is displayed. Become.

In this way, when the variable effect is started in the customer waiting state (the period during which the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the effect key 162), the volume adjustment and the light amount by the effect key 162 are performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Adjustments are being regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player overlooks the important aspect of starting the fluctuation effect by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is visually recognized even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed. Is regulated (erased). Therefore, the fluctuation effect is not hindered by the volume value image OG, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, even if the volume value is adjusted by operating the changeover switch (not shown) while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed, but if the volume value image OG is being displayed, the effect key 162 The volume value image OG corresponding to the newly set volume value is displayed regardless of whether the volume is adjusted by the operation of the changeover switch (not shown). Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the newly set volume value, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41, the variation effect by the effect symbol (small symbol 56, sub-first variation indicator 81, etc.) is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the variable display of the special symbol has been started by the staging symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the variation effect by the decorative symbol 41 includes a pre-variation operation (symbol floating, rotation, etc.) in which the decorative symbol 41 is operated in a predetermined display mode, and a scroll display, and the effect symbol (small symbol 56, sub-first). In the variation effect by the variation display 81 and the like), the variation display of the effect symbol is executed without operating the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, the effect of the variation effect can be enhanced by the pre-variation operation of the decorative symbol 41, and the player can be made aware that the variation display of the special symbol has been started by the effect symbol, which improves the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Further, after the pre-variation operation (design floating, rotation, etc.) by the decorative symbol 41, the hold information (hold number display 55, hold icon HI, LED in the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84) (Holding display, etc.) is now (already) reduced. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the movement display of the hold icon HI is started during the pre-variation operation (the symbol is raised, rotated, etc.) by the decorative symbol 41. The movement display of the hold icon HI may be a movement display from the first hold icon display area 70B to the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the movement display from the first hold icon display area 70B to the icon display area 70C may be used. That is, it may be possible to move the hold icon HI and display it as the icon TI.
In these cases, the player can detect that the reserved memory has decreased at an early stage, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the movement display of the hold icon HI is terminated during the pre-variation operation (the symbol is raised, rotated, etc.) by the decorative symbol 41. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game in which the variable effect is performed by reducing the reserved memory, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is possible to display the icon TI during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotating, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the flow of the game in which the variable effect is performed by displaying the icon TI, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to produce the hold icon HI during the pre-variation operation (the design is raised, rotated, etc.) by the decorative symbol 41. Therefore, it is possible to improve the staging effect while appealing to the player that there is a reserved memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is possible to produce the icon TI during the pre-variation operation (the design is raised, rotated, etc.) by the decorative symbol 41. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable staging is started by turning the player's eyes to the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at least a part of the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is operated (horizontal scrolling) even before the pre-variation operation (floating, rotation, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41 is started. , Scene changes, movements of characters included in the background image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect together with the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at least a part of the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background image described later) is operated (horizontal scrolling, scene change) during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotating, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41. , The movement of the character included in the background image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect together with the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode, etc.) can be output when the pre-variation operation (floating, rotating, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the output of the BGM (BGM corresponding to each effect mode, etc.) is started during the pre-variation operation (floating, rotating, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variation effect even before the pre-variation operation by the decorative symbol 41 is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , After the end timing of the first cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the scroll display of the decorative symbol 41 becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (2 to 3 cycle fluctuations). After the start timing (after the start timing of the fourth cycle variation), the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 in the variation effect is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations coincides with the start timing of the scroll display of the decorative symbol 41, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol is the start timing of the scroll display of the decorative symbol 41. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

In addition, scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 is started after the end of the first cycle variation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). It has become like. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the special symbol and the scroll display of the decorative symbol 41 in stages, the effect of the game effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main and the decorative symbol 41 is in the subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbol 56 is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbol 56 becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. It will be possible.

Further, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation). Before, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbol 56 is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the update variation (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbol 56 match, the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the update variation of the small symbol 56 (the update variation of the small symbol 56). It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is the start of scroll display and switching display).

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is started, the update fluctuation (scroll display) of the small symbol 56 is started. , Switching display) is started, that is, it is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the timing of the first display change in the cycle fluctuation and the start timing of the update fluctuation (scroll display, switching display) of the small symbol 56 becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. Is possible. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is the main and the small symbol 56 is in the subordinate relationship, and it is possible to make the player recognize the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the hold display (hold icon and hold number display 55 on the image display unit 114, LED hold on the sub first hold display 83 and the sub second hold display 84) The update of the display) is started, that is, it is started without intentionally synchronizing the two. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the update start timing of the hold display becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (end timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). Before, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the hold display (hold icon and hold number display 55 on the image display unit 114, sub first hold display 83 and sub second hold display 84). The update of the LED hold display) is started. Therefore, by matching the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations with the update start timing of the hold display, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the update start timing of the hold display. It becomes possible.

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is started, the hold display (on the image display unit 114). The update of the hold icon, the hold number display 55, the LED hold display on the sub 1st hold display 83 and the sub 2 hold display 84) is started, that is, both are started without being intentionally synchronized. ing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the update start timing of the hold display becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold display has been updated since the variable display of the special symbol has started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is the start time of the shift display of the hold icon HI. It is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

Further, the shift display (decrease display) of the hold icon HI is terminated after the end of the first cycle fluctuation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold icon HI is shifted and displayed because the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , Before the end timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI is started, that is, the two are intentionally started without being synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced. Become.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle fluctuation), the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the shift display of the hold icon HI to the icon TI match, the start timing of the change display of the special symbol is set to the icon TI of the hold icon HI. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is the start of the shift display.

Further, after the first display change in the cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the variation of the special symbol is completed, the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon TI. The display is finished. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to impress the player with the flow that the hold icon HI is shifted to the icon TI since the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , After the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation), the audible output of the predetermined game sound (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) starts, that is, both start without intentionally synchronizing. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). The audible output of a predetermined game sound (variable BGM, variable start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is started before the end timing of the second cycle variation. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations coincides with the start timing of the audible output of the predetermined game sound, the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the predetermined game sound. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). , After the start timing of the first cycle variation), the audible output of the staging BGM (variable BGM for each staging mode) starts, that is, both start without intentionally synchronizing. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the audible output of the staging BGM becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, a timing different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (start timing of the second cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). Before, before the end timing of the second cycle variation), the audible output of the staging BGM (variable BGM for each staging mode) is started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the audible output of the staging BGM match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the audible output of the staging BGM. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation (the display start of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the time, before the start timing of the first cycle fluctuation, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image) starts. That is, they are intentionally started out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing such as strictly matching the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image becomes unnecessary, and the control load and the development burden can be reduced.

Further, when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing is different from the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations (on the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on). At the start of display, before the start timing of the second cycle fluctuation, at the end of the customer waiting demo production), the production operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each production mode, zone background image), etc. ) Is to be started. Therefore, when the start timing of the second and subsequent cycle fluctuations and the start timing of the effect operation of the background image match, it is misunderstood that the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol is the start time of the effect operation of the background image. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

In addition, before the start of the first cycle fluctuation (when the display of the fluctuation standby screen after the power is turned on) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222), The effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene change, etc.) of the background image (background image for each effect mode, zone background image) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored in the customer waiting state before the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variation effect, the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display) before the decorative symbol 41 starts scroll display (update display). The number of cycle fluctuations executed by the vessel 222) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production according to the type of pre-variation movement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, depending on the type of pre-variation operation (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the variation effect, the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display) before the decorative symbol 41 starts scroll display (update display). The number of display changes in the cycle fluctuation executed by the device 222) may differ. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production according to the type of pre-variation movement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the fluctuation effect is started while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the decorative symbol 41 instead of hiding the volume value image OG. By changing to the state of being displayed (set) on the lower layer of, the visual recognition of the volume value image OG may be restricted by displaying the decorative symbol 41 so as to overlap the rear of the decorative symbol 41.

(Specific example when starting a prize during variable production)
A specific example of a start winning prize during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80.

FIG. 79 is a timing chart in the case of starting and winning a prize during the variation effect, and FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 79. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 79, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Yth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, and the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C. It is displayed and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 80 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 79, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the first hold number becomes "1" and the first special symbol hold indicator 218 displays "1", and the game A winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 80 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the winning command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub first hold display 83 “1”. Is displayed. Further, the additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode to the first display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B by animation and the output of the first winning sound are started (FIG. 80 (c)). reference).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 79, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation ends and the output of the first winning sound also ends. (See FIG. 80 (d)).

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is executed over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize at the start port during the execution of the variation display of the special symbol, the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) is output over a plurality of cycle fluctuations. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and outputs the winning sound (first winning sound, second winning sound) during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the volume of the variable BGM is maintained without decreasing. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the fluctuation effect by the winning sound and improve the fun of the game.

(Specific example when continuously performing variable effect)
A specific example of the case where the variation effect is continuously executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83.

81 is a timing chart in the case of continuously executing a variable effect, and FIGS. 82 to 83 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 81. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 81, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, the central decorative symbol 41 is scrolled at a low speed (update fluctuation), and the small symbol 56 is updated fluctuation (scroll). Display, switching display). Further, the first hold icon display area 70B displays two hold icon HIs in the normal display mode, and the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in the normal display mode, so that the variable BGM is displayed. It is audibly output (see FIG. 82 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 81 (at the start of the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the central decorative symbol 41 that was scroll-displayed (updated fluctuation) temporarily stops, the temporary stop sound is emitted from the speaker 156. The output is started, and the character of the decorative symbol 41 in the center performs an effect operation (a motion before the stop that shakes the head), and all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 82 (b)). Here, the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 can also be regarded as a stop operation effect performed when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 81 (during N + second cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 82 (c)). ..

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 81, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300. Further, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 82 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 81, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 (“523”) and the small symbol 56 (“523”) is started (. See FIG. 82 (e)).
It should be noted that the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI may be started after the fluctuation display on the sub-first variation display 81 is stopped or after the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed.

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 81, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 82 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 81, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 221 is started (FIG. 83 (g). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 81 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-th. 1 The hold indicator 83 becomes a “1” display, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 83 (h)).

Further, the two hold icon HIs displayed on the first display unit of the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the decorative symbol 41 starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the small symbol 56 starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 83 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 81 (during the second cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the floating display of the decorative symbol 41, the look-ahead effect effect executed only by the current variation effect is started, and the decoration is started. A blue effect image EF is displayed around the symbol 41 (see FIG. 83 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 81 (during the fourth cycle fluctuation), when the shift display of the two hold icons HI ends, the first hold icon HI is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). .. At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update change) of the decorative symbol 41 is started (see FIG. 83 (i)).

The operation of the decorative symbol 41 before stopping is not limited to the above-mentioned example. As an operation before stopping the decorative symbol 41, for example, an animation display of an effect image around the decorative symbol 41 may be performed. Further, as the operation before stopping the decorative symbol 41, for example, the rotation operation of the decorative symbol 41 may be performed. Further, as the operation before stopping the decorative symbol 41, for example, the ups and downs operation of the decorative symbol 41 may be performed.

In this way, the variable BGM that was output before the execution of the pre-variation operation (the floating, rotation, etc. of the symbol) by the decorative symbol 41 can be continuously output even during the execution of the pre-variation operation. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect as if a plurality of variable effects were spun, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, when the icon change effect is executed at the start of the variable effect (when the icon shift display is performed), the icon display mode is not changed from the start of the icon shift display, but the icon shift. The display mode of the icon is changed at the time of completion (after). Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the display mode of the icon conspicuous and enhance the effect of the icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effects, rotation, etc.), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variation effect is not completed during the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the decoration that temporarily stops next while the decorative symbol 41 (for example, the decorative symbol 41 on the left side) that temporarily stops depending on the type of the variation effect pattern performs the pre-stop operation (ups and downs of the symbol, effect, rotation, etc.). The symbol 41 (for example, the decorative symbol 41 on the right side) may perform a pre-stop operation or a variable display. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game. The operation mode of the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 that is temporarily stopped first and the decorative symbol 41 that is temporarily stopped next is the same, but different operation modes may be used. Further, in the case of shortened fluctuation, the operation before stopping may not be performed.

In addition, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effects, rotation, etc.), the staging symbol (small symbol 56, sub 1st variable display 81, sub 2nd variable display 82, etc.) is used for staging. It is supposed to be running. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variation effect is not completed during the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effect, rotation, etc.), it is possible to execute the extinction effect of extinguishing the icon TI. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The extinction effect can also be regarded as the stop / non-display effect described in the first embodiment.

Further, after the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effect, rotation, etc.), the stop display by the decorative symbol 41 can be executed, and after the stop display by the decorative symbol 41, the icon TI disappears. It has become like. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effect, rotation, etc.), the stop display by the decorative symbol 41 can be executed, and the effect symbol (small symbol 56, sub first variable display 81, sub) can be executed. After the stop display by the second variable display 82 or the like is executed, the extinction effect for extinguishing the icon TI can be executed. Therefore, the progress of the game production becomes clear, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the variation effect by the decorative symbol 41, the decorative symbol 41 can be stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol 41 is operated before stopping (ups and downs of the symbol, effect, rotation, etc.), and the effect symbol (small symbol 56, After the variation effect by the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, etc.), the stop display can be executed without operating the effect symbol before the stop. Therefore, while enhancing the effect of the variable effect by the decorative symbol 41, the player can be made aware of the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, after the decorative symbol 41 is operated before stopping (ups and downs of the symbol, effect, rotation, etc.), a background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, a zone background described later) is being executed by the decorative symbol 41. It is possible to execute a background effect that operates at least a part of (image, etc.). Therefore, even after the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the execution of the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effects, rotation, etc.) and the execution of the stop display by the decorative symbol 41, the background image (background image corresponding to each effect mode, zone background described later). It is possible to execute a background effect that operates at least a part of (image, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41 or even after the display is stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (before and at the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). Before the end timing of the cycle fluctuation, after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, and after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a predetermined mode (temporary stop display, stop display). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to add depth to the game production and improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped and displayed before the last cycle variation in the case of displaying the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is completed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game in which the variable display of the special symbol ends after the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after and the last timing after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (the second special symbol display 222). The small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed after the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of the above and after the stop display timing of the special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect related to the stop display of the small symbol 56, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, at the end of the case where the hold icon HI is operated (swaying operation, rotation operation) during the execution of the variation effect and the change display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). Even after the end of the cycle fluctuation of, the effect operation of the hold icon HI is continuously performed. Therefore, the hold icon HI makes it possible for the player to know that the number of holds is not "0" and does not give the player a feeling of boredom even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Further, a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after and the last timing after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). After the end timing of the cycle fluctuation of, and after the stop display timing of the special symbol), the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect related to the disappearance display of the icon TI, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

Further, after the cycle fluctuation in the case where the variation display of the special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is completed, the disappearance display of the icon TI is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game that the icon TI is deleted because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle fluctuation (during execution of the fluctuation effect) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). The audible output of (variable BGM, fluctuation start sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) is output at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation (after the start timing of the last cycle fluctuation, after the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation). , It is possible to end after the stop display timing of the special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of the effect when the predetermined game sound is audibly output, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, complicated processing that strictly matches the timings of the two is not required, and the control load and the development load can be reduced.

In addition, a predetermined game sound started before the last cycle fluctuation (during execution of the fluctuation effect) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222). It is possible to end the audible output (temporary stop sound, etc.) before the cycle fluctuation ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impression of the previous variable display from being dragged to the next variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a predetermined game sound (variable BGM) that has been output before the last cycle fluctuation in the case where the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the variation of the special symbol. It is possible to continuously output audible sound even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the background image effect operation (horizontal scrolling, scene) that was output before the last cycle fluctuation when the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is used to display the variation of the special symbol. Changes, etc.) are continuously executed even after the end of the cycle fluctuation (during stop display). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead zone effect, look-ahead effect effect) executed with the start of the variation effect is executed after the end of the first cycle variation in the case of performing the variation display of the special symbol. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the flow of the game that the look-ahead effect is executed because the variable display of the special symbol is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example when the variable effect is started without receiving the stop command normally)
A specific example of a case where the variation effect is started without normally receiving the stop command will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started without normally receiving the stop command, and FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 84. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T2 in FIG. 84 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T2 in FIG. 81, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T3 will be described.

At the timing of T3 in FIG. 84, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 85 (d)).

However, since the staging control unit 300 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56, etc. should be started at the timing of T4 in FIG. 84, but the decorative symbol 41 should be started. The stop display of the small symbol 56 and the like is not started, and the variable display on the sub first variable display 81, the display of the icon TI, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41, and the variable display of the small symbol 56 are continued. It will be. If the staging control unit 300 cannot normally receive the stop command, the fluctuation display period on the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 41, and the small The variable display period of the symbol 56 may be extended.

Next, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 84, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. The start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is sent to. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 becomes "0" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 221 is started (FIG. 85 (e). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 84 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-th. 1 The hold indicator 83 becomes "0" display, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub first variation indicator 81 starts from the first (off) (see FIG. 85 (f)). ..

Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased by non-animation, and the hold icon HI displayed in the first display unit starts shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. do. This non-animated erasure of the icon TI is regarded as an extinction effect of the icon TI. Further, after the decorative symbol 41 that had been temporarily stopped after the fluctuation effect was started is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment, the ascending display as the operation before the fluctuation is started, and the small symbol that has been scrolled (updated fluctuation) is started. 56 continues the scroll display without stopping display (see FIG. 85 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 84 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). After that, the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 is started (see FIG. 85 (g)).

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variation effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variation effect is ended. When the third command (the command at the time of the next start) is received in the state where the current variation effect is not set, the current variation effect is forcibly terminated and the next variation effect is started. That is, the variation effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variation effect ends even if the third command (next start command) is received without receiving the second command normally. It has become like. In other words, in both the case where the second command is received and the case where the second command is not received, the previous variation effect ends during the execution of the next variation effect. Therefore, by starting the next variable effect, it is possible to appropriately end the previous variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if a start command is received during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 41 is displayed at the symbol stop position for a moment (same as when the stop command was normally received). (In the embodiment), the variable effect (here, the floating display) is started. Therefore, the variable effect can be started in the same manner as when the start command is received during the stop display of the decorative symbol 41, and the game when the variable effect is started from the state where the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. It is possible to reduce the discomfort of the person and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the start command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the displayed icon TI is erased and displayed in a shorter time than the non-animation, that is, the erase display in the animation. Therefore, when the hold icon HI next shifts to the icon display area 70C, the shift display is not obstructed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the staging effect.

If the start command is received by the staging control unit 300 in a state where the command is garbled due to a wiring abnormality or noise, the content of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 221 (for example). In some cases, the content of the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed by the image display unit 114 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach variation of 13.5 seconds. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, the image display unit 114 is in a state where the variation effect (specifically, the SP reach effect) is executed, and the next start is performed in this state. When the hour command is received, the current variation effect is forcibly terminated and the next variation effect is started. Regarding this point, the same operation is performed for a gaming machine that sends / receives a start command but does not send / receive a stop command.

(Specific example when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of a case where the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits state will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88.

FIG. 86 is a timing chart when the normal variation effect ends and the customer waits state, and FIGS. 87 to 88 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 86. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 86, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation) and the sub-th 1 The fluctuation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the fluctuation display 81 is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, the central decorative symbol 41 is scrolled at a low speed (update fluctuation), and the small symbol 56 is updated fluctuation (scroll). Display, switching display). Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output. Further, the volume value image OG is displayed so as to partially overlap the front side of the decorative symbol 41 on the right (see FIG. 87 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 86 (during the Nth cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when the decorative symbol 41 in the center, which has been scrolled (updated), temporarily stops, the temporary stop sound is output from the speaker 156. After the start, the character of the decorative symbol 41 in the center performs an effect operation (a motion before stopping to shake the head), and all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 87 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 86 (during the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of fluctuation), when the lower button of the effect key 162 is operated for volume adjustment, the volume value changes from "4" to "3". do. At this time, the image display unit 114 is updated to the volume value image OG indicating the volume value “3”, and the speaker 156 starts outputting the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume value “3” (FIG. 87). See (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 86 (during the N + 1th cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 87 (d)). ..

Next, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4 in FIG. 86 (during the N + second cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation) to the effect control unit 300. Command) is sent. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 87 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 86, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 (“523”) and the small symbol 56 (“523”) is started. .. Further, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 are restricted for a predetermined period (1 second), and the volume value image OG is erased, but the output of the confirmation sound continues (see FIG. 87 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 86, the output of the confirmation sound ends when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses (see FIG. 88 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 86, the icon TI disappears in the animation. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the display, the erase display of the icon TI in the animation ends (see FIG. 88 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 86, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the waiting period is set to the customer waiting state and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game control unit 200 waits for the customer to the staging control unit 300. A status specification command is sent.

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 86, when the stop waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at the audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 88 (i)). (See), when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo production for appealing the game to the player is started.

If the decorative symbol 41 (small symbol 56) is stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the stop command during the output of the confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the effect key 162 is restricted, while the confirmation sound is output. The output is continued until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but this is also the case at the start of the variation effect, and the start command is received during the output of the confirmation sound. Even when the execution of the corresponding variable effect is started, the volume adjustment by the effect key 162 is restricted, while the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period elapses.

In addition, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute) when a predetermined period elapses after receiving the customer waiting state specification command, but if the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the variable BGM is changed. The audible output is not stopped, and for example, when a customer waiting state designation command, a jackpot game opening designation command, or the like is received next, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute).

Additional elements when the fluctuation is stopped In this way, when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation effect (the period during which the volume adjustment and the light amount can be adjusted by the effect key 162), the effect is produced over a predetermined period (1 second). Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the key 162 are regulated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player overlooks the important aspect of the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 by concentrating on the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Additional elements when the fluctuation is stopped If the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, even if the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the last adjustment operation) has not elapsed, In order to ensure the visibility of the decorative symbol 41 that is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted (erased). Therefore, the visibility of the decorative symbol 41 that is stopped and displayed by the volume value image OG is not hindered, and the player can confirm the decorative symbol 41 that is stopped and displayed, which can improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

In addition, if the variable effect starts or the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed during the output period of the volume confirmation sound, the volume adjustment by the effect key 162 is restricted, but the volume confirmation sound is The output is continued until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses. Therefore, the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

What is the point of dropping the BGM? In addition, when the normal fluctuation effect ends and the customer waits, the audible output of the fluctuation BGM continues for a predetermined period. Therefore, compared to the case where the audible output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped (mute) immediately after the normal fluctuating effect is completed, it is less likely that the player is willing to stop the game, and the operation of the gaming machine is improved. Is possible.

In addition, BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) can be continuously output during the execution of the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effects, rotation, etc.) and during the execution of the stop display by the decorative symbol 41. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored even during the operation before the stop of the decorative symbol 41 or during the stop display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effects, rotation, etc.), the volume of the BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) is adjusted according to the operation for a predetermined operation unit (effect key 162, etc.). It is possible. Therefore, the BGM can be output at a volume suitable for the player even during the operation before the decorative symbol 41 is stopped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, during the pre-stop operation of the decorative symbol 41 (ups and downs of the symbol, effects, rotation, etc.), the volume of the BGM (variable BGM for each effect mode) is adjusted according to the operation for a predetermined operation unit (effect key 162, etc.). It is possible, and the volume of the BGM can be suppressed by outputting the notification sounds of various errors. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the error notification sound is disturbed by the BGM, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value image OG is not hidden, but is displayed (set) on the upper layer of the decorative symbol 41 for decoration. It may be changed to the state displayed (set) in the lower layer of the symbol 41. In this way, since the volume value image OG is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative symbol 41, the visibility of the volume value image OG is restricted, while the visibility of the decorative symbol 41 is ensured and stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern 41 can be confirmed by the player.

Further, the volume confirmation sound is output when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 while waiting for customers, and the volume confirmation sound is not output when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 during the variable effect. The volume confirmation sound may not be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 while waiting for customers, and the volume confirmation sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 during the variable effect. ..

Further, the volume value image OG is displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 regardless of whether the effect is in the waiting state for customers or the variable effect, but the operation of the effect key 162 in the waiting state for customers is performed. The volume value image OG may be displayed when the volume is adjusted by, and the volume value image OG may not be displayed when the volume is adjusted by operating the effect key 162 during the variation effect.

In addition, when the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 corresponding to the reception of the stop command is performed during the output of the confirmation sound, or when the execution of the variation effect according to the reception of the start command is started during the output of the confirmation sound. Even so, the confirmation sound continues to be output until the output period (0.5 seconds) elapses, but when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped or displayed, the execution of the variable effect is started. In that case, the output of the confirmation sound may be stopped even if the output period has not elapsed. By doing so, it is difficult to confuse the confirmation sound with the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound, the fluctuation start sound and the fluctuation stop sound can be easily heard, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example when the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed because the stop command cannot be received normally)
A specific example of a case where the stop command cannot be normally received and the end of the normal fluctuation effect is delayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart in the case where the stop command cannot be normally received and the end of the normal variation effect is delayed, and FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T3 in FIG. 89 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T3 in FIG. 86, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T4 will be described.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of T4 in FIG. 89 (N + in the middle of the second cycle fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation), the game control unit 200 issues a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the staging control unit 300. Will be sent. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 90 (e)).

However, since the staging control unit 300 could not normally receive the stop command, the stop display of the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56, etc. should be started at the timing of T5 in FIG. 89, but the decorative symbol 41 should be started. And the stop display of the small symbol 56 etc. will not be started. Then, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81, the display of the icon TI, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41, the fluctuation display of the small symbol 56, the display of the volume value image OG, and the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the effect key 162. Will continue to be possible (see FIG. 90 (f)). If the staging control unit 300 cannot normally receive the stop command, the fluctuation display period on the sub-first variation display 81, the display period of the icon TI, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 41, and the small The variable display period of the symbol 56, the display period of the volume value image OG, and the possible period of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 may be extended.

Next, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 89, when the output period of the confirmation sound elapses, the output of the confirmation sound ends (see FIG. 90 (g)), and at the timing of T7 in FIG. 89, the stop time of the special symbol elapses. Then, the waiting period is set in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game control unit 200 sends a customer waiting state designation command to the effect control unit 300.

After that, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, the non-animated disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is performed, and the decorative symbol 41 (“523”) and the small symbol 56 (“523”) are displayed at the symbol stop position. (= Stopped display state). On the other hand, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 is maintained, and the display of the volume value image OG is also maintained (see FIG. 90 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 89, when the display period of the volume value image OG (10 seconds from the operation of the effect key 162 for the previous volume adjustment) elapses, the volume value image OG is hidden (FIG. 90 (FIG. 90). i)) At the timing of T10 in FIG. 89, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the output of the variable BGM at the audible volume is stopped (muted) (FIG. 90 (FIG. 90). j)), and after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is disclosed.

Even if the staging control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command transmitted from the game control unit 200 while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the game control unit is basically displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed. Similar to the case where the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the stop command transmitted from 200, the variable effect is not executed. Therefore, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 is maintained, and the volume value image. The OG will not be erased.

If the stop command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the variation display on the sub-first variation display 81 is stopped, the icon TI disappears in a non-animated manner, the decorative symbol 41 and the small one. Since the stop display of the symbol 56 is not performed, the state in which the volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 is maintained, and the volume value image OG is not erased.

BGM drop point In addition, if the stop time command and the customer waiting state specification command cannot be received normally, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are not stopped and displayed, so that the specified period (after the customer waiting state) is reached. Even after 30 seconds) has elapsed, the audible output of the variable BGM is maintained.

In this way, when the first command (start command) is received, the variation effect is started, and when the second command (stop command) is received, the variation effect is ended. When the third command (customer waiting state designation command) is received in the state where the current fluctuation effect is not set, the current fluctuation effect is forcibly terminated and the customer waiting state is set. That is, the variation effect ends when the second command (stop command) is received, but the variation effect ends even if the third command (customer waiting state specification command) is received without receiving the second command normally. It has become like. In other words, in both the case where the second command is received and the case where the second command is not received, the variation effect ends when the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately end the variable staging by starting the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command or the stop command transmitted from the game control unit 200 (disconnection of the command line connecting the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, disconnection of the connector, etc.) ), The volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the effect key 162 are not restricted, and the state in which the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are possible is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command or the stop command transmitted from the game control unit 200 (disconnection of the command line connecting the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, disconnection of the connector, etc.). Is designed to maintain the display of the volume value image OG until the display period of the volume value image OG elapses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the start command is received by the staging control unit 300 in a state where the command is garbled due to a wiring abnormality or noise, the content of the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 221 (for example). In some cases, the content of the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed by the image display unit 114 (for example, 40 seconds of the SP reach effect) is different from the normal reach variation of 13.5 seconds. In such a case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, the image display unit 114 is in a state where a variable effect (specifically, an SP reach effect) is executed, and in this state, a customer waiting state is set. When the specified command is received, the current fluctuation effect is forcibly terminated and the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Regarding this point, the same operation is performed for a gaming machine that sends / receives a start command but does not send / receive a stop command.

(Specific example when the loss normal reach fluctuation production ends and the customer is waiting)
A specific example of a case where the loss normal reach fluctuation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93.

FIG. 91 is a timing chart when the loss normal reach fluctuation effect is completed and the customer is in a waiting state, and FIGS. 92 to 93 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 91. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 91, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is “0” ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "0". Further, three decorative symbols 41 and three small symbols 56 are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 92 (a)).

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 91, when the normal reach effect in which the central decorative symbol 41 scrolls and displays at a low speed is started with the left and right decorative symbols 41 temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the audible output of the variable BGM is started. Is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM is started (see FIG. 92 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 91, when the dark background image is displayed on the image display unit 114 and the blackout effect is started, the decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the effect button 161 is displayed. The validity period of the promotion effect and the effect button 161 that prompt the operation is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and the promotion sound "press" is output from the speaker 156. (See FIG. 92 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 91, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period elapses, the development failure effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect fails and ends with the normal reach effect is executed. .. Specifically, the development failure image SIG is displayed on the image display unit 114, the failure sound of "Chin" is output from the speaker 156, and the audible output of the normal reach BGM is restarted (FIG. 92 (d)). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 91, when the execution period of the blackout effect elapses, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the decorative symbol 41 returns to the position before the start of the blackout effect. The normal reach effect is resumed (see FIG. 92 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 91, when the central decorative symbol 41 that was scrolled at low speed (update fluctuation) temporarily stops at "6", the output of the temporary stop sound is started from the speaker 156, and the central decoration. The character of the symbol 41 performs an effect operation (a motion before the stop that shakes the head), and the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped at the reach loss result (“565”). Further, although the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped, the audible output of the variable BGM is not restarted (see FIG. 92 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound ends (see FIG. 93 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 91, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 93 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by the animation is started, and the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 (“565”) and the small symbol 56 (“565”) is started. (See FIG. 93 (i)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 91, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 93 (j)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 91, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the waiting period is set to the customer waiting state and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game control unit 200 waits for the customer to the staging control unit 300. A status specification command is sent. After that, when the demo waiting period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo production for appealing the game to the player is started.

In this way, when the normal reach effect is executed, when the normal reach effect is started, the variable BGM is muted (silenced) and the normal reach BGM is output, so that the normal reach effect can be effectively excited. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the customer waits after the loss normal reach fluctuation effect, the effect BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) is not output from the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41 before the normal reach variation effect ends. Since it is in a state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the normal reach production has ended and that the loss has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Instead of stopping the output of the staging BGM (variable BGM, normal reach BGM) from the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41, the variable BGM is audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM by the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 41. You may do it. By doing so, when the normal reach fluctuation production with a low jackpot expectation is lost, the player will not be extremely discouraged.

(Specific example when the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed)
A specific example of a case where the variable effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96.

FIG. 94 is a timing chart when the variation effect is executed after the loss SPSP reach effect is completed, and FIGS. 95 to 96 are diagrams showing examples of the effect at various timings of FIG. 94. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 94, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is "2" ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, three decorative symbols 41 are scrolled (updated and varied) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, and the small symbols 56 are updated (scrolled and switched). Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1 in FIG. 94, when the normal reach effect in which the central decorative symbol 41 scrolls and displays at a low speed is started with the left and right decorative symbols 41 temporarily stopped at the same symbol, the audible output of the variable BGM is started. Is stopped (muted) and the output of the normal reach BGM is started.

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 94, when the dark background image is displayed on the image display unit 114 and the blackout effect is started, the decorative symbol 41 is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the image display unit 114 The promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 161 and the validity period of the effect button 161 are started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the promotion sound "press" is output from the speaker 156. (See FIG. 95 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 94, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period elapses, the development success effect suggesting that the development to the SP reach effect is successful and the SP reach effect is executed is executed. Will be done. Specifically, the development success image HSG is displayed on the image display unit 114, and the success sound "I did it" is output from the speaker 156 (see FIG. 95 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the blackout effect elapses, the display of the SP reach background image and the output of the SP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SP reach effect is started. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 changes to a display mode in which only numbers are displayed, and the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size (see FIG. 95 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the SP reach effect elapses, the display of the SPSP reach background image and the output of the SPSP reach BGM are started, and the execution of the SPSP reach effect is started. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a state of being smaller than the normal size, and the first hold icon display area 70B is hidden together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 95 (d)). ..

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 94, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 161 and the valid period of the effect button 161. Is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the promotion sound of "press" is emitted from the speaker 156. It is output (see FIG. 95 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 94, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed. Specifically, the failed image HBG is displayed on the image display unit 114, and the failure sound of "Chin" is output from the speaker 156. Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the central decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped at "6", so that the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped at the reach loss result ("565") (FIG. 95 (f). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 94, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect elapses, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shield image (for example, an eye-catching image including a model name, a model-specific character, etc.) that shields a background image, a decorative pattern 41, or the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the decorative symbol 41 is returned to the position before the start of the SP reach effect and returned to the first mode to be temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 96 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 94, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 96 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 94, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. Further, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by the animation is started, and the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 (“565”) and the small symbol 56 (“565”) is started. (See FIG. 96 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 94, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 96 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 94, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 changes to the effect control unit 300. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 221 is started (FIG. 96 (k). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 94 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the start command, the hold number display 55 and the sub of the first start port 121 The first hold indicator 83 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ◎ in the figure) on the sub first variation indicator 81 is started from the first (off) (see FIG. 96 (l)). ).

Further, the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the decorative symbol 41 starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, the small symbol 56 starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variation BGM is restarted. (See FIG. 96 (l)).

Although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the same applies to the SP reach variation effect. The normal reach BGM reproduction is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the normal reach BGM output is resumed in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. It is designed to output SP reach BGM without doing so.

Further, although the SPSP reach variation effect has been described here, the case where the SP reach variation effect is lost is the same as the case where the SPSP reach effect is lost, and the decorative symbol 41 which is lost in the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect ends, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted. , The decorative symbol 41 is returned to the normal size and the first aspect, and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the pre-reading zone effect is executed and the pre-reading zone background is displayed and the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the reach state, it is normal as in the mode A background image. This is the same as when the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed in the reach state with the background image displayed, but the decorative symbol 41 that is lost in the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is temporarily stopped. Then, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed is executed, and when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the normal background image (before becoming the look-ahead zone background image) is executed. For example, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image) is restarted, and the decorative symbol 41 returns to the normal size and the first mode and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the first variable effect (normal reach variable effect) in which the blackout effect (suggestion effect) suggesting whether or not the SP reach effect is executed is executed, the normal reach BGM continues to be played during the blackout effect. The blackout effect (suggestion effect) that suggests whether or not the SP reach effect is executed by muting (silence) while keeping it, returning the normal reach BGM that was muted in the normal reach effect after the blackout effect to the audible output, In the second variation effect (SP / SPSP reach variation effect) to be executed, the reproduction of the normal reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect, and the SP reach BGM is output in the SP reach effect after the blackout effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of voice control when executing the SP reach effect, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of voice control.

Further, when the SP reach effect is started while the first background image (for example, the mode A background image which is a normal background image) or the second background image (look-ahead zone background image) corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, it is normal. Along with changing to a third background image (SP reach background image) that indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the background image, the decorative symbol 41 that has formed a reach state and is temporarily stopped is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size. do. Then, when the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped due to loss, the first background image (normal background image is mode A background image) is changed, and the three decorative symbols 41 are stopped and displayed in the normal size. It has become. Therefore, the effect of the SP reach effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 changes, the mode of the effect operation (content of operation, cycle of operation, etc.) of the hold icon HI or the icon TI does not change. ing. Therefore, the player can be concentrated on the SP reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, during the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon HI is hidden while the icon TI is displayed. Therefore, the player can be concentrated on the SPSP reach production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, after the end of the SPSP reach effect, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to the player that the variable effect is executed again after the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed, while the SPSP reach effect is executed. In some cases, the small symbol 56 is hidden, but the display is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SP reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is completed, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the SPSP reach effect is finished and that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is restored to the first mode by executing the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the display mode of the decorative symbol 41, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first stop suggestion effect (display of the eye-catching image) is executed to return the SPSP reach background image to the mode A background image. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the change in the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the hold icon HI and the icon TI are displayed during the blackout effect, at least one of the hold icon HI and the icon TI is hidden, and the display is resumed when the SP reach effect is started. You may.

In addition, when the effect button 161 is operated by generating an effect period during the blackout effect or the effect period elapses, the development success effect or the development failure effect is executed, but the effect period should not be generated. You may. In this case, the development success effect or the development failure effect may be executed, or the normal reach effect may be restored or the SP reach effect may be developed without executing the development success effect or the development failure effect. good.

Further, the hold icon HI and the icon TI are kept displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, and the hold icon HI is hidden and the icon TI is kept displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. May hide the hold icon HI and keep the icon TI displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, and hide the hold icon HI and the icon TI during the execution of the SPSP reach effect.

(Specific example when the jackpot SPSP reach fluctuation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed)
A specific example of the case where the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99.

FIG. 97 is a timing chart when the jackpot SPSP reach variation effect is completed and the jackpot game is executed, and FIGS. 98 to 99 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 97. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

Since the timings of T0 to T5 in FIG. 97 are basically the same as the timings of T0 to T5 in FIG. 94, the description here is omitted, and the timings after T6 will be described.

First, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 97, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect and the determined effect is started, the promotion image prompting the operation of the effect button 161 and the valid period of the effect button 161. Is started. Specifically, the operation promotion image SSG imitating the effect button 161 is displayed on the image display unit 114, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and the promotion sound of "press" is emitted from the speaker 156. It is output (see FIG. 98 (e)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 97, when the effect button 161 is operated or the valid period elapses, a decision success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed. Specifically, the first movable member 115a and the second movable member 115b descend (largely descend) to the staging position, and the second movable member 115b moves in the left-right direction. Further, the image display unit 114 displays the determined success image SEF, and the speaker 156 outputs a success sound of "Kyuinkyuin". Further, in the upper left corner of the screen, the central decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped at "5", so that the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped at the jackpot ("555") (FIG. 98 (f). )reference).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 97, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect elapses, the first stop suggestion effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) suggesting that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, a shield image (an eye-catching image including a model name) that shields a background image, a decorative pattern 41, or the like is displayed. Then, when the first stop suggestion effect is completed, the side-scrolling of the mode A background image is restarted, and the decorative symbol 41 is returned to the position before the start of the SP reach effect and returned to the first mode to be temporarily stopped. Become. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the hold icon HI (see FIG. 98 (g)).

In addition, a second stop suggestion effect is started, which suggests that the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed with a big hit. Specifically, the light emission display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the decorative symbol 41 and disappears is repeated twice in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.75 seconds) (see FIG. 98 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 97, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 sends a stop command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300. Further, the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 99 (h)).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. Further, when the second stop suggestion effect is completed, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by the animation is started, and the decorative symbol 41 (“555”) and the small symbol 56 (“555”) are started. The stop display at ()) is started (see FIG. 99 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 99 (j)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 97, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits an opening designation command for the jackpot game to the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 99 (k)).

Next, at the timing of T13 in FIG. 97, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the opening designation command for the jackpot game, the opening effect of the jackpot game is started. Specifically, an opening effect screen including the characters "big hit" is displayed, and it is suggested that the game ball is launched aiming at the right area (large winning opening) of the game area 111 in the right corner of the screen. The right-handed image UG is displayed.

In this way, in the variable effect that becomes a big hit, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained when the SPSP reach effect is not executed after the SP reach effect is executed. On the other hand, although it is hidden when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the display of the small symbol 56 is maintained regardless of whether or not the SPSP reach effect is executed after the SP reach effect is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the variable display is in progress, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the variable effect that is a big hit, the display of the hold icon HI (hold icon in the normal display mode, hold icon in the special display mode) is maintained even when the SP reach effect does not develop after the normal reach effect. There is.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, is completed, the second stop suggestion effect (light emission display effect in which the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the decorative symbol 41 and disappears) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the SPSP reach effect is finished and that the jackpot decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, one effect time (0.75 seconds) and cumulative effect time (1.5 seconds) of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is the cycle of the hold icon effect operation (sway operation, rotation operation) (sway operation, rotation operation). It is different from 2 seconds or 3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting display effect in the second stop suggestion effect stand out, and it is possible to emphasize that the jackpot decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect mode of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is that the effect image EF moves from one end to the other end of the decorative symbol 41 and disappears, but one end of the numerical image portion of the decorative symbol 41. The effect image EF may move from one end to the other end and disappear, or the effect image EF may move from one end to the other end of the character image and disappear.

Further, although the cumulative production time of the light emission display effect in the second stop suggestion effect is shorter than the cycle of the effect operation of the hold icon (2 seconds or 3 seconds), for example, one effect time of the light emission display effect can be set. By setting it to 2 seconds, the cumulative effect time may be longer than the period (2 seconds or 3 seconds) of the effect operation of the hold icon HI.

Further, although the hold icon HI is displayed again after the end of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon HI may not be displayed again depending on the type of the SPSP reach effect. Specifically, when the first SPSP reach effect is executed or the second SPSP reach effect that is lost is executed, the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the execution of the first stop suggestion effect, and it is a big hit. When the second SPSP reach effect is executed, the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed as it is without executing the first stop suggestion effect (displaying the eye-catching image) or redisplaying the hold icon HI. You may.

In addition, the hold icon HI is redisplayed after the end of the SPSP reach effect, but when the revival effect that becomes a big hit is executed after the decorative symbol 41 of the reach loss result is temporarily stopped, the revival effect is being executed. The hold icon HI may be hidden again. In this case, the decorative symbol 41 with a big hit may be temporarily stopped after the revival effect is executed, and the hold icon may be redisplayed, or the decorative symbol 41 with a big hit may be displayed or held after the revival effect is executed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be executed as it is without redisplaying the icon HI.

If the stop command can be normally received during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 41, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach loss variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 in the jackpot variation effect. However, if the stop command cannot be received normally in the jackpot variation effect, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 in the jackpot variation effect is larger than the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach loss variation effect. It can be longer. Further, when the stop time command or the opening designation command cannot be normally received in the jackpot variation effect, the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 in the jackpot variation effect is longer than the temporary stop time of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach loss variation effect. It is getting longer.

(Specific example when recovering from the power failure that occurred during the fluctuation production)
A specific example of recovery from the power failure generated during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103.

FIG. 100 is a timing chart in the case of recovering from a power failure generated during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 101 to 103 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 100. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 100, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is "2" ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, three decorative symbols 41 are scrolled (updated and varied) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling, and the small symbols 56 are updated (scrolled and switched). Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 101 (a)).

Next, when a power failure occurs in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is stopped at the timing of T1 in FIG. 100, the game control unit 200 performs a process when the power is cut off, and the first special symbol display 221 etc. The display 130 including the sub-first variable display, the sub-information display 80 including the sub-first variable display, the image display unit 114, the sub-display device, etc. are hidden, and the gaming sound (variable BGM, etc.) output from the speaker 156. Is also in a non-output state (see FIG. 101 (b)).

Then, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resumed at the timing of T2 in FIG. 100, a reading screen (initial screen) including the characters "NOW LOADING" is displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sub display device. A command when the power is turned on from the game control unit 200, which has restored the game control state to the state before the power failure occurred, to the effect control unit 300 (here, the second power supply indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). The recovery designation command, the first special symbol storage designation command, and the second special symbol storage designation command) are transmitted. In addition, the information display on the display 130 is resumed, the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 is restarted from the state before the power is turned off, and the first special symbol hold indicator 218 is used. The display of "2" of the first hold number of the above is also resumed (see FIG. 101 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the command when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned power recovery notification and the initial stage of various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) At the same time as the operation (including the return operation) is started, the information display on the sub information display 80 is started (see FIG. 101 (d)).

At this time, in the image display unit 114 during the power restoration notification, the power restoration image displayed on the entire screen is set as the top layer, and various effect images (background image according to the effect mode at the time of power restoration, power restoration at the time of power restoration). The decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, which are the initial appearances of the above, the hold icon HI according to the number of holds and the effect mode at the time of power restoration, the hold number display 55 according to the number of holds at the time of power restoration, etc.) are from the power restoration image. The image data for power recovery notification set in the lower layer is generated and displayed. At this time, the visual recognition of various effect images is restricted by the power restoration image, but the background image and the hold icon are in the effect operation state, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are stopped and displayed at the symbol stop position. Become. Further, the hold icon HI is set to the normal display mode (white icon) even if the special display mode is before the power cut, and the icon TI is hidden even if it is displayed before the power cut. (See FIG. 101 (d)).

Further, in the sub information display 80 during the power recovery notification, the sub first fluctuation display 81 and the sub second fluctuation display 82 are in a state of being stopped without displaying the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 and the sub are displayed. The second hold indicator 84 is in a state of displaying the number of holds (see FIG. 101 (d)).

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 at the timing of T4 in FIG. 100 (power restoration notification is ongoing), the first hold number becomes "3" and the first special symbol hold indicator 218. Is displayed as "3", and a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first look-ahead designation command) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the staging control unit 300 (see FIG. 102 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the winning command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub first hold indicator 83 are set to "3. Is displayed. In addition, additional display of the hold icon HI (white icon) in the normal display mode on the third display portion of the first hold icon display area 70B is started by animation, but it is visually recognized by the power recovery image set in the upper layer. Is in a regulated state (see FIG. 102 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 100, when the change time of the special symbol elapses after the additional display of the hold icon HI in the animation is completed, the game control unit 200 gives a stop command (design) to the effect control unit 300. Confirmation command) is sent. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 102 (g)).

Next, at the timing of T7 in FIG. 100, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the power recovery notification ends, and various staging images whose visual recognition is restricted by the power recovery image. (Background image according to the effect mode at the time of power restoration, decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 which are the initial appearances at the time of power restoration, the current hold number and the hold icon HI according to the effect mode, according to the current hold number. (Holding number display 55, etc.) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 103 (h)).

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 100, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "3" to "2" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 changes to the effect control unit 300. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 becomes "2" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 221 is started (FIG. 103 (i). )reference).

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 100 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the start command, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub-th. 1 The hold indicator 83 becomes a “2” display, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 103 (j)).

Further, the three hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B start shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the decorative symbol 41 starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, the small symbol 56 starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display), and the audible output of the variation BGM is started. (See FIG. 103 (j)).

Then, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 100 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, the first one is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). Further, the scroll display (update variation) of the decorative symbol 41 is started (see FIG. 103 (k)).

When the effect mode D (probability change game state) is controlled or the effect mode F is controlled when the power is restored, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode. The numerical image of the symbol 41 becomes the initial decorative symbol "753" which is common to the case where the effect mode A (normal game state) is controlled when the power is restored. In addition, when the power is restored to the effect mode D (probability changing game state), the initial decorative symbol is set to "246" or the like so as to be distinguished from the case where the effect mode A (normal game state) is controlled when the power is restored. You may do it.

Further, when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored after the power supply is stopped during the customer waiting state, the game control unit 200 sends a customer waiting state designation command to the effect control unit 300. Therefore, the staging control unit 300 receives the customer waiting state designation command while the reading screen (initial screen) is being displayed, and is waiting for the execution of the variable staging without the power recovery notification being performed (decorative pattern). The variable standby screen (where 41 can be visually recognized) is displayed.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is stopped during the jackpot game, it takes time until the next round designation command or ending designation command is output from the game control unit 200. Therefore, after the reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power recovery notification is performed, and then the effect screen corresponding to the command is displayed.

In this way, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power restoration image displayed in the entire display area of the image display unit 114 is set as the upper layer. By generating image data in which the hold icon displayed in the icon display area of the image display unit 114 is set in the lower layer and displaying it in the image display unit 114, the hold icon in the lower layer is restricted from being visually recognized. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player is confused after the power is restored. Further, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, if a special symbol memory designation command indicating that the number of holds has increased is received, the increase is responded to. Image data including the hold icon is generated. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

Further, even when the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, the hold icon and the background image perform the effect operation. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

In addition, even if the display of the hold icon is restricted by the power recovery image, the hold icon will be additionally displayed (increased) by animation when the number of holds increases. There is. Therefore, since the same display control as when the power recovery image is not displayed can be performed, it is possible to reduce the control data and the control load related to the display control.

Further, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is different depending on whether the control is performed in the first effect mode (effect mode A) or in the second effect mode (effect modes D and F) when the power is restored. However, the numerical image of the decorative symbol 41 has common numerical information (“753”). Therefore, even if the display mode of the decorative symbol differs depending on the effect mode after the power is restored, it is possible to easily grasp that the power is restored.

Further, in the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219) and the second hold display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84). , The display mode of the hold display is not changed based on the look-ahead result, but the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area (the hold display area of the image display unit 114). Then, the display mode of the hold display (hold icon HI) can be changed based on the look-ahead result, and when the power supply is stopped, the hold display is not performed in any of the first to third hold display areas, and after the power is restored. Is the first hold display area (first special symbol hold display 218) rather than the restart timing of the hold display (visible display of the hold icon HI) in the third hold display area (hold display area of the image display unit 114). , The second special symbol hold display 219) and the second hold display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84), the hold display restart timing is earlier. Therefore, it is possible to let the player grasp the number of holdings at an early timing while notifying that the power supply is being restored. It should be noted that the hold display restart timing in the first hold display area may be earlier than the hold display restart timing in the second hold display area.

Further, the hold icon HI that was displayed in the special display mode before the occurrence of the power failure is displayed in the normal display mode after the power is restored. Therefore, it is not necessary to back up and store information indicating that the hold icon is in the special display mode in the staging control unit 300, and it is possible to avoid complicating the hardware configuration of the staging control unit 300. ..

In addition, after the power is restored, the hold icon is visibly displayed after the fluctuation display (blinking due to the moving lighting of the LED) on the first special symbol display 221 (second special symbol display 222) is resumed. It has become like. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after displaying the power recovery image, the initial operation (including the return operation) of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-display device, effect button 161) performs the effect operation at different timings for each accessory. It is designed to be executed in the same manner as. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the initial operation of various accessories is executed by the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is a staging operation.

The sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 are in a state of being stopped and displayed without displaying the fluctuation during the power recovery notification, but the power recovery notification is in progress ( The variation display may be performed after receiving the second power recovery designation command indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, and the stop display may be performed when the stop command (symbol confirmation command) is received.

(Specific example when the start command could not be received normally during the look-ahead effect)
A specific example of a case where the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106.

FIG. 104 is a timing chart when the start command cannot be normally received during the look-ahead effect, and FIGS. 105 to 106 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at various timings of FIG. 104. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 104, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 in the state where the first reserved number is "2" ( Blinking: ◎ in the figure) is being executed. At this time, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121, and the sub first hold indicator 83 are displayed as "2". Further, three decorative symbols 41 and three small symbols 56 are updated and changed (scroll display, switching display) in front of the mode A background image during side-scrolling. Further, in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode (white) and the hold icon HI in the special display mode (blue) are displayed. Further, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output (see FIG. 105A).

Next, when the look-ahead zone effect is started at the timing of T1 in FIG. 104, the above-mentioned in-zone effect is executed. Specifically, instead of the mode A background image, the look-ahead zone background image is displayed in a side-scrolled state, and the zone image ZG including the character image of "ZONE" is displayed. Further, the volume of the variable BGM is lowered and the output of the zone BGM is started (see FIG. 105 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 104, when the central decorative symbol 41 that has been scrolled (updated and fluctuated) is temporarily stopped, the output of the temporary stop sound is started from the speaker 156, and the character of the central decorative symbol 41 is produced. The motion (the motion before the stop that shakes the head) is performed, and all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 105 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T3 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the output of the temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound is stopped, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 A stop command (design confirmation command) is sent to. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 105 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period elapses after the staging control unit 300 receives the stop command, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 stops. In addition, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C by animation is started, and the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 (“523”) and the small symbol 56 (“523”) is started (. See FIG. 105 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 104, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI, the disappearance display in the animation of the icon TI ends (see FIG. 105 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 104, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "2" to "1" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 changes to the effect control unit 300. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 becomes "1" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 221 is started (FIG. 106 (g). )reference).

However, since the staging control unit 300 could not normally receive the start command, the hold display is normally updated at the timing of T7 in FIG. 104 (the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the sub first hold display). Update of the device 83, shift display of the hold icon HI) and fluctuation effect should be executed, but they will not be executed. Therefore, the stop display period of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is extended, and the look-ahead effect effect that should be executed from the current variation effect to the two variation effects is not started. However, even during the extension period of the stop display period of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, the side-scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image and the effect of the hold icon HI are continuously performed. (See FIG. 106 (h)). That is, the side-scrolling of the look-ahead zone background image is continued, and the display of the zone image ZG is continued. In addition, the periodic shaking operation of the hold icon HI is continuously performed.

Then, at the timing of T8 in FIG. 104, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the game control unit 200 transmits a stop time command (symbol confirmation command) to the effect control unit 300. In addition, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 (see FIG. 106 (i)).

However, when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the stop command, the disappearance display of the icon TI and the stop display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 should be executed. Will not be executed.

After that, at the timing of T9 in FIG. 104, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first hold number changes from "1" to "0" and the jackpot determination is performed, and the game control unit 200 changes to the effect control unit 300. A start command (special symbol memory specification command, game state specification command, special symbol specification command, special symbol variation pattern specification command) is transmitted. Further, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 becomes "0" display, and the variation display (first cycle variation) of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 221 is started (FIG. 106 (j). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T10 in FIG. 104 (during the first cycle fluctuation), when a predetermined period elapses after the effect control unit 300 receives the start command, the hold number display 55 and the sub of the first start port 121 The first hold indicator 83 becomes "0" display, and the variation display (blinking: represented by ⊚ in the figure) on the sub first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 106 (k)).

Further, of the two hold icon HIs displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the hold icon HI (white icon) corresponding to the change display of the previous special symbol is erased in a non-animated manner, and the second hold icon HI is deleted. The hold icon HI (blue icon) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the display unit is displayed in the first display unit in a non-animated manner. Then, the hold icon HI displayed on the first display unit starts the shift display (decrease display) to the icon display area 70C. Further, the variation effect is started, the decorative symbol 41 starts the floating display as the pre-variation operation, and the small symbol 56 starts the update variation (scroll display, switching display) (see FIG. 106 (k)).

Then, at the timing of T11 in FIG. 104 (during the second cycle variation), when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the floating display of the decorative symbol 41, the look-ahead effect to be executed from the previous variation effect to the two variation effects. The effect is started one time later, and the blue effect image EF is displayed around the decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 106 (l)).

After that, at the timing of T12 in FIG. 104 (during the fourth cycle change), when the shift display of the hold icon HI ends, it is displayed as the icon TI (white icon). At this time, the icon change effect at the start of the change is performed, the icon TI is displayed as a blue icon, and then the scroll display (update change) of the decorative symbol 41 is started.

In this way, when the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the special symbol to be executed for the predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect). Even so, a predetermined look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by preventing the predetermined pre-reading effect from being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect is not executed during the variation display of the special symbol for which the predetermined look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) should be started, the special symbol It is restricted that a predetermined look-ahead effect is started during the variable display, and if the variable effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol to be executed next, the pre-reading restricted during the variable display of this special symbol is performed. The production has started. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by preventing the predetermined pre-reading effect from being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, if the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation display of the special symbol is executed but the variation effect is not executed, the first look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is executed. However, the second look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect effect) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the progress of the game by preventing the predetermined pre-reading effect from being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable BGM (suggestion effect sound) is output during the execution of the variable effect (suggestion effect) for suggesting the result of the jackpot determination, and the target variable effect that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone effect is executed. From the front, a zone BGM (preliminary effect sound) suggesting that a special game may be executed is output, and a zone BGM is output even after the start of the target variation effect, and when the zone BGM is output. , The suggestive effect is output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM. Therefore, the effect of the look-ahead zone effect can be enhanced, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The volume of the variable BGM is reduced during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (during the output of the zone BGM), but the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (mute) during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. You may do it.

Further, even if the effect control unit 300 cannot normally receive the start command and the variation effect for starting the icon change effect or the look-ahead zone effect executed over a plurality of variation effects is not executed, the next execution is performed. The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be started from the variable effect to be performed.

In addition, the look-ahead effect effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. A look-ahead countdown effect that performs countdown audio output) may be executed, or a look-ahead chance eye effect that stops and displays a so-called chance eye (a roll having a certain rule such as 556 or 667) is executed for each variable effect. Or you may try to perform those three look-ahead effects.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command is received while the menu image is displayed)
A specific example of the case where the power-on designation command is received while the menu image is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 108.

FIG. 107 is a timing chart when a power-on designation command is received while the menu image is being displayed, and FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of production at various timings of FIG. 107. Although the case of the effect mode A will be described here, the description will be omitted because the effect modes B to F are basically the same.

First, at the timing of T0 in FIG. 107, there is a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. At this time, the loss special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 221, and the mode A background image is side-scrolled (effect operation) on the image display unit 114, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are displayed. Is in a state of being stopped and displayed at the loss result (“537”) which is the stop result of the previous fluctuation effect. Further, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted) (see FIG. 108 (a)).

Next, when the effect button 161 is operated at the timing of T1 in FIG. 107, the menu operation becomes valid, and the image display unit 114 has a plurality of types of selection items (pachinko) in a state of overlapping in front of the decorative symbol 41. "Model description" item that displays the explanation about the game machine 100, "Production customization" item for customizing the effect in the variable effect, "Pachi log" item for log management linked with the mobile phone) The menu image MG including the above is displayed (see FIG. 108 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T2 in FIG. 107, when the power supply to the game control unit 200 is stopped due to an abnormality in the wiring connecting the power supply board 160 and the game control unit 200 (disconnection, disconnection of the connector, etc.), the game control unit 200 stops. The process when the power is cut off is performed, and the display 130 including the first special symbol display 221 is in a non-display state. At this time, the display states of the sub information display 80, the image display unit 114, and the sub display device continue (see FIG. 108 (c)).

After that, when the power supply to the game control unit 200 is restarted at the timing of T3 in FIG. 107, a checksum determination is made as to whether or not the data in the game RWM area is damaged, and the data is damaged. Processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game. Then, a power ON time command (here, a power-on designation command, a first special symbol storage designation command, and a second special symbol storage designation command) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. In addition, information display on the display 130 (display of a lost special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 and the like) is started (see FIG. 108 (d)).

Next, at the timing of T4 in FIG. 107, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the effect control unit 300 received the power ON command, the image display unit 114 and the sub-display device read the characters including the characters "NOW LOADING". The screen (initial screen) is displayed, the information display on the sub information display 80 is hidden for a moment, and the game sound (variable BGM or the like) is not output on the speaker 156 (see FIG. 108 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T5 in FIG. 107, when a predetermined period elapses after the reading screen (initial screen) is displayed, the power-on notification and the initial operation (return) of the above-mentioned power-on notification and various accessories (board accessory, frame accessory) are restored. (Including the operation) is started, and the information display on the sub information display 80 is started (see FIG. 108 (f)).

At this time, in the image display unit 114, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are stopped and displayed at the initial appearance (“135”) at the time of turning on the power in front of the mode A background image in which the horizontal scroll (effect operation) is started. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122. Further, the power-on notification sound is output from the speaker 156, and the mute output at the cue of the variable BGM is started (see FIG. 108 (f)).

Even when the power restoration designation command is received while the menu image MG is being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 displayed on the image display unit 114 are the initial outcomes (“753”) at the time of power restoration. Except for the point and the point that the power-on notification sound is not output, it is basically the same as when the power-on designation command is received.

When the power is turned on while the menu image MG is displayed, even if the power ON command (power on specification command, power recovery specification command) is received while the volume value image OG is being displayed. It is the same as when the command is received.

In this way, the command received from the game control unit 200 by the effect control unit 300 when the menu image MG is displayed on the image display unit 114 is a power ON command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command). In this case, the image display unit 114 makes the menu image invisible and displays an image (reading screen or the like) corresponding to the command when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the game control unit 200 and the staging control unit 300.

In the present embodiment, the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 330 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, and the game ball can be launched. By transmitting a firing permission designation command to the payout control unit 330 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be fired after the game is ready for play.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the payout control unit 330 can perform payout control even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the payout control unit 330 can be arranged in parallel with the game machine 1. Although it is possible to pay out a game ball based on a payout request from the machine (ball lending), a game ball based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the progress control of the game is started and the game becomes playable. It may be possible to pay out (pachinko).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power is not supplied to the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333), the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333) is not paid out when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on. Although the payout ball number data does not remain, the backup power may be supplied to the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM 333), and in this case, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on. If the unpaid payout number data remains in the payout control unit 330 (payout RAM333), the number of unpaid payout balls is the number of unpaid balls even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out game balls based on data.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display 130 is provided outside the game area 111, but the display 130 may be provided inside the game area 111.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the grant condition (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the large winning opening). The ball may be managed as data and the prize ball data may be added (addition to the possession ball data).

Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but a plurality of look-ahead zone effect with different jackpot expectations may be provided. In this case, when two look-ahead zone effects overlap during the variable effect, the zone image of one look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the upper side and / or the lower side of the screen so as to cross the screen, and the other look-ahead zone effect is displayed. The zone image may be displayed on the left side and / or right side of the screen so as to traverse the screen. By doing so, it is possible to achieve both of the two look-ahead zone effects, and it is possible to improve the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the jackpot notice effect, but instead of the blackout effect, the whiteout effect in which the image display unit 114 turns white may be executed. In this case, the basic flow of the effect may be the same as that of the blackout effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the variable staging is basically the same between the normal game state and the specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), but for example, the pre-stage staging in the normal game state. Post-stage production (pre-reach production and reach production case, normal reach production and SP reach production case, SP reach production and SPSP reach production case, pre-reach production and decorative pattern 41 temporarily stopped case, reach production and decoration First information (information suggesting a jackpot expectation level, information regarding execution of a special game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is notified during the execution of the subsequent stage effect of the variable effect consisting of (the case where the symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, etc.). Second information different from the first information during execution of the second stage effect of the variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the specific game state (additional information of the music that can be selected by operating the effect key 162, achievement of the mission) The situation, etc.) may be notified. Further, as a variable effect consisting of the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the normal gaming state, there is a case where the common second stage effect is executed after the first first stage effect is executed, and a case where the second first stage effect different from the first first stage effect is executed. The common post-stage effect may be executed, and information regarding the execution of the special game may be notified in the common post-stage effect executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first determination is made as to whether or not the special gaming state is favorable to the player, the right of the first determination is memorized, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the first determination is made. In addition, a second determination as to whether or not to enter the special gaming state is performed, and for example, a predetermined effect can be executed by using an effect means including the image display unit 114.
Then, the reserved symbol corresponding to the stored right can be displayed on the image display unit 114, and when the first determination is made for the right, the predetermined symbol corresponding to the right is displayed on the image display unit 114. It is possible, and based on the result of the second determination, when the first change effect of changing the reserved symbol to the first display mode suggesting that there is a high possibility of becoming a special gaming state is executed, and the first determination or Based on the result of the second determination, there is a case where the second change effect of changing the predetermined symbol is executed in the second display mode suggesting that the special gaming state is likely to occur, and the reserved symbol and the predetermined symbol are used. It is possible to execute a predetermined suggestion effect while displaying, and then execute a first change effect or a second change effect, and a special gaming state may be obtained based on the result of the first determination. When the right that is determined to be in the special gaming state by the second determination is stored when the special effect suggesting that is high is not executed, it is easier to execute the first change effect than the second change effect. It may be configured. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect of changing a predetermined symbol (the symbol) that can enhance the interest of the game, and further, a reserved symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the special game can be executed, and when executing the notification effect, for example, an operation valid state in which the operation for the effect button 161 is enabled is set as a specific game state. If it is determined that the special game is not executed in the first period of the above, the notification effect is executed at the first ratio, and the special game is executed in the second period shorter than the first period in the specific gaming state. If it is determined that the above is not executed, the notification effect may be executed at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player by using, for example, the effect button 161.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a special effect suggesting that the jackpot game is likely to be performed, and in the special effect, when performing the first effect suggesting that the jackpot game is performed. , When performing a second effect that suggests that the jackpot game may not be performed, and when it is determined that the jackpot game will be performed after the second effect is performed in the special effect. Even if it is not done, it is possible to perform a re-challenge effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot game will be performed, and whether or not the re-challenge effect is performed, before performing the second effect in the special effect. , The configuration may be such that it is possible to perform a suggestion effect suggesting that a re-challenge effect may be performed. The re-challenge effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after it is suggested that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be out of order in the special effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.). Examples of the re-challenge effect include an effect of urging the player to operate the effect button 161. Further, as a re-challenge effect, a mini game may be performed by a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the effect image. Further, as a re-challenge effect, a fight may be performed by a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the effect image. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game in relation to the execution of the re-challenge effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol, and the special game is executed. It is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that a special game will be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern performed according to the above.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is to be executed is obtained, the first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is the first hour and the variation time of the special symbol are from the first hour. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the second fluctuation pattern which is also a long second time. Further, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first advance notice effect is executed as the advance notice effect with the first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, what is the first probability? When a second notice effect different from the first notice effect is executed as a notice effect with a different second probability and the second notice effect is executed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol is started. The decorative symbol of the first aspect is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the decorative symbol of the first aspect is smaller than the decorative symbol of the first aspect during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol. When the decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed and the first notice effect is executed, the first notice effect is executed without displaying the decorative symbol of the second aspect while displaying the decorative symbol of the first aspect. , When the first notice effect is executed, the probability that the game is controlled in the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the first game state, after the special game is executed, is higher in the first game state. The configuration may be higher than the controlled probability. This makes it possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 showing the determination result is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol, and the special game is executed. It is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that a special game will be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 performed in response to the event.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is to be executed is obtained, the first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is the first hour and the variation time of the special symbol are from the first hour. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the second fluctuation pattern which is also a long second time.
Then, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect executed at a predetermined execution timing and the advance notice effect executed at a plurality of execution timings, and when the first fluctuation pattern is selected, the advance notice is given with the first probability. When the first notice effect is executed as the effect and the second fluctuation pattern is selected, the second notice effect different from the first notice effect is performed as the advance notice effect with a second probability different from the first probability. When executing and executing the second notice effect, the first mode is to start the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the special symbol. The decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed, the decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect smaller than the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol, and the first notice effect is executed. In this case, the first notice effect may be executed without displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect while displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect. This makes it possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 showing the determination result is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol, and the special game is executed. It is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that a special game will be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 performed in response to the event.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is to be executed is obtained, the first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is the first hour and the variation time of the special symbol are from the first hour. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the second fluctuation pattern which is also a long second time. Further, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first advance notice effect is executed as the advance notice effect with the first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, what is the first probability? When a second notice effect different from the first notice effect is executed as a notice effect with a different second probability and the second notice effect is executed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol is started. The decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started, and the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol. A special game is executed without displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect while displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect smaller than the one, and displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect in the first notice effect. There is something to notify that, and the configuration may be such that the second advance notice effect is easier to be executed when the advance effect is executed than when the advance effect is not executed. This makes it possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 showing the determination result is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol, and the special game is executed. It is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that a special game will be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 performed in response to the event, and it is possible to execute the specific effect during a specific period.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is to be executed is obtained, the first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is the first hour and the variation time of the special symbol are from the first hour. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the second fluctuation pattern which is also a long second time. Further, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first advance notice effect is executed as the advance notice effect with the first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, what is the first probability? When a second notice effect different from the first notice effect is executed as a notice effect with a different second probability and the second notice effect is executed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol is started. The decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started, and the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol. When the decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect smaller than the size is displayed and the first notice effect is executed, the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed, but the decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect is not displayed. 1 The advance notice effect may be executed, and the specific effect may be executed as the advance notice effect. This makes it possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 showing the determination result is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol, and the special game is executed. It is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying that a special game will be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 performed in response to the event.
Then, when a determination result indicating that the special game is to be executed is obtained, the first variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is the first time and the variation time of the special symbol are from the first hour. Any variation from a plurality of variation patterns including a second variation pattern which is a long second time and a third variation pattern which is a third time in which the variation time of the special symbol is longer than the second hour. Select a pattern. Further, when the first variation pattern is selected, the first advance notice effect is executed as the advance notice effect with the first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, what is the first probability? A second notice effect different from the first notice effect is executed as a notice effect with a different second probability, but the first notice effect is not executed, and the first probability when the third fluctuation pattern is selected. When the second notice effect is executed with a third probability different from both the second and second probabilities, and the second notice effect is executed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol is started. In the meantime, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 41 is started, the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed, and during the execution of the predetermined effect during the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect is displayed. When displaying the small decorative symbol 41 of the second aspect and executing the first notice effect, the first notice is displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect while displaying the decorative symbol 41 of the first aspect. It may be configured to execute the production. This makes it possible to carry out a highly entertaining production.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of first operation pattern data indicating the operation pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol of one of the plurality of effect symbols is stored, and the change of the effect symbol of one of the plurality of effect symbols is stored. A plurality of second operation pattern data indicating the operation pattern at the end are stored, and the effect pattern data in which the combination of the effect by the effect symbol using the first operation pattern data and the second operation pattern data is stored is stored.
Then, the variation effect is controlled based on the effect pattern data, the operation at the start of the variation of the effect symbol 1 is controlled by using the first operation pattern data, and the effect symbol 1 is used by using the second operation pattern data. The operation at the end of the fluctuation of is controlled, and the operation at the start of the fluctuation of one of the plurality of effect symbols differs according to each of the plurality of first operation pattern data, and among the plurality of effect symbols. The operation at the end of the variation of the effect symbol of 1 may have a different configuration depending on each of the plurality of second operation pattern data. This makes it possible to simplify the control of the staging.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of first operation pattern data indicating the operation pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol of one of the plurality of effect symbols is stored, and the change of the effect symbol of one of the plurality of effect symbols is stored. A plurality of second operation pattern data indicating the operation pattern at the end are stored, and a third operation pattern data indicating the changing operation pattern of one of the effect symbols among the plurality of effect symbols is stored. Further, the first operation pattern data, the second operation pattern data, and the effect pattern data that defines the combination of the effects by the effect symbols using the third operation pattern data are stored.
Then, the variation effect is controlled based on the effect pattern data, the operation at the start of the variation of the effect symbol 1 is controlled by using the first operation pattern data, and the effect pattern 1 is used by using the third operation pattern data. The motion during the fluctuation is controlled, and the motion at the end of the fluctuation of the effect symbol 1 is controlled by using the second motion pattern data. Further, the operation at the start of the change of one of the plurality of effect symbols differs according to each of the plurality of first operation pattern data, and at the end of the change of one of the plurality of effect symbols. The operation of is different depending on each of the plurality of second operation pattern data, and the first operation pattern data includes the first operation pattern data A and the first operation pattern data B. Then, when a plurality of effect symbols are started to change based on the result of the special game determination, one of the plurality of effect symbols is started to change using the first motion pattern data A, and a plurality of effects are started. Another effect symbol among the symbols may be configured to be able to start varying by using the first operation pattern data B. This makes it possible to simplify the control of the staging.

[Design variation action production of decorative design 41]
Next, the symbol variation action effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a symbol variation effect (symbol variation action effect), which is characterized by a pre-variation operation and a during-variation operation.
The symbol variation action effect includes a default action and a special action different from the default action. Then, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the probability of executing the symbol variation effect using the special action is increased as compared with the case of the loss. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, by executing a special action, the player is expected to win a big hit.
The symbol variation action effect can be appropriately combined with various symbol variation effects in the present embodiment.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the symbol variation effect executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, the player executes a special action to win the jackpot in the symbol variation effect. Can be expected. Here, the expectation of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of special action described later. Furthermore, a special action may be provided that is used only when it is determined to be a big hit and is not used when it is determined to be a miss.
Further, for example, when it is determined by the preliminary determination that there is a hold to win the jackpot, a special action may be executed in the symbol change effect before the symbol change is performed for the hold as a continuous notice effect. For example, when the symbol variation effect using the same type of special action is executed consecutively (for example, two or more times or three times or more), compared with the case where the special action is performed only once. , You may raise the expectation of the jackpot. That is, the higher the number of consecutive symbol fluctuations using the same type of special action, the higher the expectation of the jackpot.

Next, the default action and the special action will be specifically described.
In the following description, the symbol variation effect in the time saving state will be described as an example, but the symbol variation action effect may be executed in the time saving state.

(Default action)
As shown in FIG. 109 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends.
Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 performs a pre-variation operation that moves upward for a moment so as to float. Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (3), the decorative symbol 41 starts scrolling to move downward in the vertical direction. In this example, all three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously).
Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (4), the decorative symbol 41 scrolls downward at high speed in the vertical direction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), the scroll speed of the decorative symbol 41 gradually decreases. In this example, all three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously).
Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, and the emission image HG that performs an effect of emitting light behind the decorative symbols 41 is generated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 109 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 are the gaps, and the lottery results show the gaps.
When the lottery result of the big hit is shown, after the high-speed scroll of FIG. 109 (4), for example, a reach effect (including SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect) is executed, and the decorative pattern of doublet is executed. It will stop at 41.

Next, the special action will be specifically described. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment has four types of special actions, "reverse vertical scroll", "horizontal rotation fluctuation", "expansion fluctuation", and "rotational cylinder fluctuation".

(Special action (reverse vertical scroll))
As shown in FIG. 110 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends.
Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 performs a pre-variation operation that moves downward so as to sink for a moment. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (3), the decorative symbol 41 starts scrolling to move vertically toward the upper side. In this example, all three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously). Here, the small symbol 56 of the present embodiment varies in the vertical direction so as to scroll downward. Therefore, when the decorative symbol 41 is a special action and reverse vertical scrolling is performed, the direction of change (update) between the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is different.
Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (4), the decorative symbol 41 scrolls upward at high speed in the vertical direction. In this example, all three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously).

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (5), the scroll speed of the two decorative symbols 41 gradually decreases in the decorative symbol 41. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (6), the doublet decorative symbol 41 in which the two decorative symbols 41 are aligned temporarily stops. When the doublet decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the emission image HG is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) behind the doublet decorative symbol 41.
Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (7), the two decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reduced size and moved to the corner of the screen. In addition, the SP reach effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (8), when the lottery result of the jackpot is shown, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped as the special symbol stops changing.
When the result of the lottery for the deviation is shown, the decorative symbol 41 for the deviation is fixedly stopped after the high-speed scrolling in FIG. 110 (4).

(Special action (horizontal rotation fluctuation))
As shown in FIG. 111 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends.
Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three decorative symbols 41 perform a pre-variation operation that rotates laterally to the right for a moment at each position. Further, behind each decorative symbol 41, a number obtained by adding "+1" to the number of the currently displayed symbol is displayed. Specifically, when the numbers "1", "2", and "3" are shown as the three decorative symbols 41, the numbers "2", "3", and "4" are behind each decorative symbol 41. Each is displayed. Then, the numbers on the front side and the numbers on the back side of the decorative symbol 41 change their directions according to the lateral rotation (rotation) of the decorative symbol 41.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (3), each of the three decorative symbols 41 starts to rotate laterally to the left in the opposite direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (4), each of the three decorative symbols 41 rotates at high speed in the lateral direction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (5), the speed of lateral rotation of the three decorative symbols 41 gradually decreases in the decorative symbol 41. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (6), the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and a light emitting image HG that performs an effect of emitting light behind the decorative symbol 41 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). To.
Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (7), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 111 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 are the gaps, and the lottery results show the gaps.
When the lottery result of the big hit is shown, after the high-speed lateral rotation of FIG. 111 (4), for example, a reach effect (including SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect) is executed to obtain doublet. Confirmation stops at the decorative symbol 41.

(Special action (expansion fluctuation))
As shown in FIG. 112 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends.
Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, each of the three decorative symbols 41 performs a pre-variation operation in which the display size is enlarged as compared with that before the start of the variation.
Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 start scrolling to move downward while being enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (4), each of the three decorative symbols 41 scrolls downward at high speed in the vertical direction while being enlarged and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (5), the scroll speed of the decorative symbol 41 is gradually reduced while being enlarged and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (6), the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, and a light emitting image HG that performs an effect of emitting light behind the decorative symbol 41 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). To.
Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (7), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 are the gaps, and the lottery results show the gaps. When the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped, they are reduced from the enlarged state and returned to the original size (for example, the size before the start of fluctuation) and displayed.
When the lottery result of the big hit is shown, after the high-speed scroll of FIG. 112 (4), for example, a reach effect (including SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect) is executed, and the decorative pattern of doublet is executed. It will stop at 41.

(Special action (fluctuation))
As shown in FIG. 113 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the display size of the three decorative symbols 41 displayed on the screen was reduced, and a number was added to the upper and lower sides of the three decorative symbols 41 displayed on the screen by "+1". The numbers and the numbers obtained by subtracting "-1" from the numbers are displayed. That is, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed like a reel of a slot.
Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (3), scrolling is started in each vertical direction. This makes the reels of the slot appear to rotate.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (4), each of the three decorative symbols 41 scrolls downward at high speed in the vertical direction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (5), the scroll speed of the three decorative symbols 41 gradually decreases in the decorative symbol 41.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (6), the doublet decorative symbol 41 in which the two decorative symbols 41 are aligned temporarily stops. When the doublet decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the emission image HG is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) behind the doublet decorative symbol 41.
Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (7), the two decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a reduced size and moved to the corner of the screen. In addition, the SP reach effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (8), when the lottery result of the big hit is shown, the decorative symbol 41 of the doublet is fixedly stopped as the change of the special symbol is stopped.
When the result of the lottery for the deviation is shown, the decorative symbol 41 for the deviation is fixedly stopped after the high-speed scrolling in FIG. 113 (4).

Next, an example of the symbol variation action effect in the time saving state will be described.
In this example, the decorative symbol 41 used from the start of the variable display in the time-saving state is different from the decorative symbol 41 used from the start of the variable display in the time-saving state. Specifically, as the decorative symbol 41 used in the time-saving gaming state, a numerical image SG surrounded by a circle image (see, for example, FIG. 109 (1)) is used. On the other hand, as the decorative symbol 41 in the time saving state, a character image CG and a numerical image SG surrounded by a circle image are used.

Then, in the example of the symbol variation effect in the time saving state, the default action is the same as the series of operations described with reference to FIG. 109, except that the mode of the decorative symbol 41 is different. On the other hand, the symbol variation action effect in the symbol variation effect in the time saving state is as follows.

(Special action (reverse vertical scroll))
As shown in FIG. 114 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends.
Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 performs a pre-variation operation that moves downward so as to sink for a moment.
After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (3), the decorative symbol 41 starts scrolling to move vertically toward the upper side. In this example, all three decorative symbols 41 move together (synchronously). Here, the small symbol 56 of the present embodiment varies in the vertical direction so as to scroll downward. Therefore, when the decorative symbol 41 is a special action and reverse vertical scrolling is performed, the direction of change (update) between the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is different.
Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (4), the decorative symbol 41 scrolls upward at high speed in the vertical direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (5), the scroll speed of the two decorative symbols 41 gradually decreases, and the two decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped at the doublet. That is, the normal reach effect is executed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (6), the scroll speed of the central decorative symbol 41 gradually decreases.
Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In this example, the three decorative symbols 41 are out of place, and the lottery result shows the out of place.

When the lottery result of the big hit is shown, after the reach effect shown in FIG. 114 (5), for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed, and finally the doublet decoration is performed. Confirmation stops at symbol 41. Further, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a reduced size, or the character image CG may not be used and only the numerical image SG surrounded by the circle image may be used. There is.

In addition to the above-mentioned "reverse vertical scroll", "horizontal rotation fluctuation" (see FIG. 111), "enlarged fluctuation" (see FIG. 112), and "rotational cylinder fluctuation" are also used in the symbol fluctuation effect in the time saving state. It is possible to perform a special action according to (see FIG. 113).

[Event 1 when the command cannot be received]
FIGS. 115A and 115B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the event when the command is not received and the chance eye light emission effect. Specifically, FIG. 115 (a) is a timing chart when a command is received, and FIG. 115 (b) is a timing chart when a command is not received.

Here, the chance eye emission effect is an effect of executing the chance eye display effect and displaying the chance eye emission image.
Further, the chance eye display effect is an effect of displaying the chance eye. Here, the chance eyes are three decorative symbols 41 that are combined by different symbols of the same color. The chance eye display effect, for example, informs or suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable display of the next and subsequent special symbols. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. Any color may be used as the predetermined same color. As a chance, at least a part of each of the three decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in the same color. For example, as a chance eye display effect, the entire three decorative symbols 41 may be changed to green. It should be noted that the chance-eye display effect can be regarded as an effect of the same color in which a plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined manner of the same color in a manner of notifying that the special game is not performed. Further, the execution timing of the chance eye display effect is not limited to the time when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. For example, the chance eye display effect may be performed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol 41, or the chance eye display effect may be performed during the change of the decorative symbol 41. Further, for example, the change of the decorative symbol 41 may be started after the chance eye display effect is performed, or the chance eye display effect may be performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol 41. Further, for example, the reach may be established after the chance eye display effect is executed after the change of the decorative symbol 41 starts. Further, the chance eye emission image described later may be displayed regardless of which chance eye display effect is performed.

Further, the chance eye emission image is an image for showing the player as if the three decorative symbols 41, which are chance eyes, are emitting light. The chance eye emission image is, for example, an image imitating light. The chance eye emission image may be displayed in any color. In the illustrated example, the chance eye emission image is around the area where the decorative symbol 41 that is temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol 41 constituting the chance eye is temporarily stopped when the chance eye is displayed. Is displayed in. Further, the chance eye emission image may not be displayed around the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but may be displayed near the area where the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, the chance eye emission image may be displayed in the whole or a part of the area where the decorative symbol 41 constituting the chance eye is displayed. Further, the chance eye emission image is not displayed when the left and right decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped while the middle decorative symbol 41 is not temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols 41 which are chance eyes are temporarily stopped. It may be displayed by doing.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, a command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the staging control unit 300 as the game progresses. Here, for example, the command transmitted by the game control unit 200 may not be received by the effect control unit 300 due to an event such as a communication abnormality between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300. In other words, the staging control unit 300 may not be able to normally receive the command from the game control unit 200 when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Hereinafter, the processing of the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b). Specifically, first, the process when a command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). Then, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described.

In the following description, it is assumed that the fluctuation start command and the pre-judgment result command include a command for specifying the number of holds, that is, a command for specifying the number of holds.
Further, the chance eye light emitting effect in the following description is executed according to the scenario of the look-ahead effect, that is, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. Here, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect specifically specifies the effect content to be executed in each of the plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuations.

The schedule data of the look-ahead effect in the illustrated example specifies that the chance eye light emission effect is executed in each of the three consecutive symbol changes including the symbol change (the change) executed at the time of winning (Fig.). Medium t13, t15, t17). Further, the schedule data of the look-ahead effect specifies the color of the chance eye emission image displayed in each symbol variation. For example, as for the schedule data of the look-ahead effect, the blue chance eye emission image is displayed in the first and second chance light emission effects, and the green chance eye emission image is displayed in the third chance eye emission effect. And so on.

The staging control unit 300 has a plurality of schedule data in advance, and selects and sets one schedule data according to the pre-determination result command. Further, although the schedule data will be described here as an example of designating an effect in three consecutive symbol fluctuations including the fluctuation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the schedule data may specify an effect in a plurality of symbol fluctuations that do not include the fluctuation.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), when a command is received, the game control unit 200 starts to change the special symbol (see t11 in the figure). At this time, the game control unit 200 transmits a variation start command to the effect control unit 300. Then, the staging control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol upon receiving the variation start command.

Further, here, the number of reservations is "2" at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. That is, the number of holdings recognized by the game control unit 200 is "2". Further, the fluctuation start command transmitted by the game control unit 200 includes a hold number designation command, and the hold number is designated as "2" in this hold number designation command. Therefore, the staging control unit 300 that has received the fluctuation start command recognizes the hold number as “2”. In addition, in this case, the reserved numbers recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the staging control unit 300 are in a state of matching each other.

Then, the game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command when the ball enters the first starting port 121 (winning) (see t12 in the figure). Upon receiving this pre-determination result command, the effect control unit 300 performs a process for executing the chance eye light emission effect, which is one aspect of the advance notice effect. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 sets the schedule data of the look-ahead effect.

Further, with the winning of the first starting port 121 (see t12 in the figure), the number of holdings recognized by the game control unit 200 becomes "3". Further, the staging control unit 300 recognizes the hold number as "3" by receiving the pre-determination result command including the hold number designation command.

Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the chance eye light emission effect at the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol (see t13 in the figure). Then, although not shown, the game control unit 200 transmits a fluctuation stop command to the staging control unit 300 at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Along with this, the staging control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative design.

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next variation start command to the effect control unit 300, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t14 in the figure). Further, the effect control unit 300 executes the chance eye light emission effect at the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol (see t15 in the figure). Although not shown, the staging control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbol as the variable stop command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the staging control unit 300. Then, as the next fluctuation start command is further transmitted, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t16 in the figure), and then executes the chance eye light emission effect (see t17 in the figure).

Next, the process when the command cannot be received will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). The process of the game control unit 200 shown in FIG. 115 (b) is the same as the process of the game control unit 200 shown in FIG. 115 (a).

Further, in the example of FIG. 115 (b), the staging control unit 300 plays a game from the time when the ball enters the first starting port 121 to the timing when the next fluctuation start command is received (see t12 to t14 in the figure). It is assumed that an event occurs in which the command from the control unit 200 cannot be received. As a result, the staging control unit 300 does not receive the fluctuation start command (see t14 in the figure). Further, after the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t14 in the figure) and until the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t16 in the figure), the staging control unit 300 is the game control unit. The event that the command from 200 cannot be received shall be resolved. As a result, the staging control unit 300 further receives the next fluctuation start command (see t16 in the figure).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), even when the command cannot be received, the first starting port 121 is started after the special symbol variation is started (see t11 in the figure) as in the above figure 115 (a). The game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command to the effect control unit 300 upon entering the ball (see t12 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the chance eye light emission effect (see t13 in the figure).

Then, the game control unit 200 stops the fluctuation of the special symbol and starts the fluctuation of the next special symbol (see t14 in the figure). Originally, the effect control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and the fluctuation start command at this timing, definitely stops the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (swinged), and starts the next fluctuation. However, in this example, the staging control unit 300 does not receive the command due to the occurrence of an event in which the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 (see the cross mark in the figure). Therefore, after executing the chance eye light emitting effect, the effect control unit 300 keeps the oscillating decorative symbol in a oscillating state without stopping the oscillating decorative symbol.

Further, since the next special symbol has started to change (see t14 in the figure), the number of pending numbers recognized by the game control unit 200 is "2". On the other hand, since the staging control unit 300 has not received the fluctuation start command including the hold number designation command, it does not recognize that the hold number is "2" and recognizes the hold number as "3". continue. That is, the number of holdings recognized by the staging control unit 300 is different from the number of holdings that should be originally recognized. In other words, the number of holds recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 does not match each other. In such a state, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the chance eye light emission effect (see the cross mark in the figure) even when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (see t15 in the figure).

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next fluctuation start command to the effect control unit 300, the event that the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 has been resolved, so that the effect control unit 300 has been eliminated. Receives the fluctuation start command and starts the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (see t16 in the figure). Further, the staging control unit 300 recognizes the number of holds as "1" by receiving the fluctuation start command. Further explaining, the staging control unit 300 receives the hold number designation command included in the fluctuation start command and changes the hold number to be recognized from "3" to "1".

Here, when receiving the command, when the hold number designation command included in the fluctuation start command is received, the hold number recognized by the effect control unit 300 is reduced by one. However, in the example in FIG. 115 (b), the change in the number of holds is different from the case where the command is received, that is, the number of holds changes from "3" to "1", that is, the number of holds decreases by 2. To. In this way, when a situation different from the original change in the number of reservations is recognized, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the chance eye light emission effect. That is, when the effect control unit 300 detects an abnormality regarding the number of pending states to be recognized, the effect control unit 300 imposes a prohibition on the chance eye light emission effect. Further explaining, when there is a difference in the number of holds recognized between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, the effect control unit 300 performs a process of resetting all the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. In the illustrated example, by performing this reset process, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (see t17 in the figure), the effect control unit 300 has a chance eye set in the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. Do not execute the light emission effect (see the cross mark in the figure). That is, the chance eye light emission effect, which is the planned light emission effect, is not performed. Further, as described above, when an event that the variation start command cannot be received occurs, the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation start command and starts the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41, the effect disappearance effect (FIG. FIG. 82 (e)) may not be executed. That is, when an event in which the variation start command cannot be received occurs, the effect control unit 300 may omit the extinction effect performed when the event in which the variation start command cannot be received does not occur. Further, when an event in which the variation start command cannot be received occurs, the staging control unit 300 receives the next variation start command and receives the next variation start command as compared with the case where the event in which the variation start command cannot be received does not occur. The execution time of the shift effect (see FIG. 46 (3)) performed at the start of the variable effect may be shortened. Further, when an event in which the fluctuation start command cannot be received occurs, the effect control unit 300 may omit the shift effect.

If the event that the command cannot be received normally occurs as described above and the process of resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect is not performed, the chance eye light emission occurs in the fluctuation other than the fluctuation that originally executes the chance eye light emission effect. Problems such as the execution of the production may occur. In these cases, the situation is such that the player is fanned by unintended fluctuations and the player is not fanned by the intended fluctuations. Therefore, in the illustrated example, in order to avoid these situations, a process of resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect is performed. To further explain, in the illustrated example, it is possible to prevent the chance eye light emission effect from being executed even though it is not the so-called look-ahead variation, which is the target of the schedule data of the look-ahead effect.

FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b) are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the event when the command cannot be received and the reach light emission effect. Specifically, FIG. 116 (a) is a timing chart when a command is received, and FIG. 116 (b) is a timing chart when a command cannot be received. Here, the reach light emitting effect is an effect of displaying the left and right decorative symbols 41 and the reach light emitting image, which are the reach eyes.

Here, the reach-eye emission image is an image for showing the player as if the left and right decorative symbols 41, which are the reach eyes, are emitting light. The reach-eye emission image is, for example, an image imitating light. The reach-eye emission image may be displayed in any color. Further, the reach-eye emission image is displayed, for example, in the vicinity of the area in the image display area of the image display unit 114 where each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, which is the reach-eye, is displayed. More specifically, the reach-eye emission image is displayed in the vicinity of the area where the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed and in the vicinity of the area where the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed. The reach-eye emission image is displayed around the area where each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, which is the reach-eye, is displayed. Further, the reach-eye emission image may be displayed in the whole or a part of the area where each of the left and right decorative symbols 41 which are reach eyes is displayed. The reach-eye emission image of the present embodiment is displayed when the reach is established.

Hereinafter, other processes by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b). Specifically, first, with reference to FIG. 116 (a), the processing when the command is received will be described, and then with reference to FIG. 116 (b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described. do.

The processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b) is the same as the processing of the game control unit 200 shown in FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b). Further, the effect control unit 300 shown in FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b) shall execute a reach light emission effect for each variation.

First, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the game control unit 200 starts the variation of the special symbol (see t21 in the figure), and the game control unit 200 transmits the variation start command to the staging control unit 300. Then, the staging control unit 300 starts to change the decorative pattern. At this time, the number of reservations recognized by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 is "2".

Then, the game control unit 200 transmits a pre-determination result command when the ball enters the first starting port 121 (see t22 in the figure). In addition, unlike the example shown in FIG. 115, in the example shown in FIG. 116, the effect control unit 300 does not set the schedule data of the look-ahead effect.

Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect at a predetermined timing (see t23 in the figure). Then, although not shown, the game control unit 200 transmits a fluctuation stop command to the staging control unit 300 at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Along with this, the staging control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative design.

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next variation start command to the effect control unit 300, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t24 in the figure). Further, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect at a predetermined timing (see t25 in the figure). Although not shown, the staging control unit 300 determines and stops the decorative symbol as the variable stop command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the staging control unit 300. Then, with the transmission of the next fluctuation start command, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t26 in the figure), and then executes the reach light emission effect at a predetermined timing (t27 in the figure). reference).

Next, with reference to FIG. 116 (b), that is, the processing when the command cannot be received will be described. In the illustrated example, as in the example shown in FIG. 115, from the time when the ball enters the first starting port 121 to the timing when the next fluctuation start command is received (see t22 to t24 in the figure). It is assumed that an event occurs in which the staging control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200. As a result, the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the fluctuation start command (see t24 in the figure). Further, in the illustrated example, the effect control is performed after the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t24 in the figure) and until the timing of receiving the next fluctuation start command (see t26 in the figure). It is assumed that the event that the unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved. As a result, the staging control unit 300 further receives the next fluctuation start command (see t26 in the figure).

First, as in FIG. 116 (a), in FIG. 116 (b), after starting the fluctuation of the special symbol (see t21 in the figure), the game control unit is accompanied by the ball entering the first starting port 121. 200 transmits a pre-determination result command to the staging control unit 300 (see t22 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect (see t23 in the figure) at a predetermined timing.

Then, the game control unit 200 stops the fluctuation of the special symbol and starts the fluctuation of the next special symbol (see t24 in the figure). Originally, the effect control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and the fluctuation start command at this timing, definitely stops the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped, and starts the next fluctuation. However, in this example, the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command due to the occurrence of an event in which the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 (see the cross mark in the figure). Therefore, the staging control unit 300 keeps swinging without stopping the decorative symbol. Further, the holding numbers recognized by both the game control unit 200 and the staging control unit 300 are in a state where they do not match each other. In such a state, the effect control unit 300 does not execute the reach light emission effect (see the cross mark in the figure) even when the next time to execute the reach light emission effect (see t25 in the figure).

Then, when the game control unit 200 transmits the next fluctuation start command to the effect control unit 300, the event that the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 has been resolved, so that the effect control is performed. The unit 300 receives the variation start command and initiates the variation of the decorative symbol (see t26 in the figure). Further, the effect control unit 300 recognizes the hold number as "1" by receiving the fluctuation start command including the hold number designation command. Here, the effect control unit 300 receives the hold number designation command and recognizes the change in the hold number, which is different from the case of receiving the command, that the hold number changes from "3" to "1". However, unlike the case shown in FIG. 115 (b), the effect control unit 300 performs the process without imposing a prohibition on the reach effect. That is, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect (see t27) at a predetermined timing.

As described above, unlike the case shown in FIG. 115 (b), even when the command cannot be received, the reach light emission effect is executed according to the next received fluctuation start command after the command cannot be received. To. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 115 (b) above, the process of the staging control unit 300 when the command cannot be received is compared with the mode of executing the special process when the command cannot be received. Is simplified.

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the control for resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect is when the chance eye light emission effect, that is, the light emission effect using the decorative symbol is set in the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. It is not limited to. For example, in the schedule data of the look-ahead effect, a hold change effect, that is, a look-ahead effect using the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 may be set.

In addition, the decorative pattern is an image that is easier for the player to pay attention to than the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. Therefore, as in the example shown in FIG. 115 (b), the player's misidentification is more effectively suppressed by imposing the prohibition that the look-ahead effect using the decorative symbol is not executed. To explain further, where it is easy for the player to pay attention to the decorative pattern, the special game is performed by performing the light emission effect using the decorative pattern even though the look-ahead fluctuation is not the target in the schedule data of the look-ahead effect. It is suppressed that the player mistakenly expects to be struck.

Further, in the above description, the control for resetting the schedule data of the pre-reading effect by the effect control unit 300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Control without prohibition, that is, even if the effect control unit 300 controls to execute the look-ahead effect according to the schedule data of the look-ahead effect without resetting the schedule data of the look-ahead effect even when the command cannot be received. good. By such control, the processing of the staging control unit 300 is simplified as compared with the case where the staging control unit 300 controls to reset the schedule data of the pre-reading staging.

Further, in the above description, it has been described that the fluctuation start command and the pre-determination result command include the hold number designation command, but the present invention is not limited to this. At other timings, or together with other commands, the game control unit 200 may transmit the hold number designation command to the effect control unit 300. Further, instead of the hold number designation command, a command indicating an increase / decrease in the hold number may be transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

Further, in the above description, even if the command cannot be received, it has been described that the reach light emission effect is executed according to the next received fluctuation start command after the command cannot be received. Is not limited to reach production. For example, even when the command cannot be received, the jackpot light emission effect may be executed according to the next received fluctuation start command after the command cannot be received. Here, the jackpot light emitting effect is an effect of displaying the doublet decorative symbol 41 and the doublet light emitting image 68.

[Event 2 when the command cannot be received]
FIGS. 117A and 117B are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the event when the command cannot be received and the execution timing of the light emission effect using the decorative symbol. Specifically, FIG. 117 (a) is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the effect by the decorative symbol when the command is received, and FIG. 117 (b) is the execution of the effect by the decorative symbol when the command cannot be received. It is a timing chart which shows the timing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b), the change in the swing time of the decorative symbol when the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command will be described. Specifically, a process when a command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). Further, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the processing when the command cannot be received will be described.

In each of FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b), a variation example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach light emission effect is executed (see “reach out of reach” in the figure) and the special symbol lottery The lottery result is a big hit, and a variation example (see "big hit" in the figure) for executing the reach light emitting effect and the big hit light emitting effect will be described.

First, an example of variation in “out of reach” when the command shown in FIG. 117 (a) is received will be described. In this variation example, when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t31 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure). Then, the staging control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol upon receiving the fluctuation stop command (see t34 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing of executing the reach light emission effect (see t32 in the figure) to the timing of definitely stopping the decorative symbol (see t34 in the figure) is set as the time T1.

Next, an example of variation in the "big hit" when the command shown in FIG. 117 (a) is received will be described. In this variation example, when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t31 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect (see t32 in the figure) at a predetermined timing, and then executes the jackpot light emission effect (see t33 in the figure). Then, the staging control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol upon receiving the fluctuation stop command (see t34 in the figure). Although not shown, the jackpot game is executed after the decorative symbol has been fixed and stopped.

Here, the time from the timing of executing the jackpot light emission effect (see t33 in the figure) to the timing of definitely stopping the decorative symbol (see t34 in the figure) is defined as the time T2. This time T2 is shorter than the time T1 (T2 <T1).

Next, an example of variation in “out of reach” when the command shown in FIG. 117 (b) cannot be received will be described. In this example, it is assumed that the staging control unit 300 cannot normally receive the fluctuation stop command of the next variation (see t34 in the figure) due to the event that the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200. .. Further, in the next fluctuation, the event that the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 until the timing of receiving the next variation stop command (see t35 in the figure) is resolved, and the effect control unit 300 eliminates the event. The following variable stop command shall be received.

In the example shown in FIG. 117 (b), when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t31 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect at a predetermined timing (see t32 in the figure).

Originally, the effect control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and definitely stops the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (swinged). In this example, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200. Cannot be received The command cannot be received due to the occurrence of an event (see the cross mark in the figure). Along with this, the staging control unit 300 keeps the oscillating decorative symbol in a oscillating state without stopping the oscillating decorative symbol.

Then, the staging control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol upon receiving the next fluctuation stop command (see t35 in the figure). Here, the time from the timing of executing the reach light emission effect (see t32 in the figure) to the timing of definitely stopping the decorative symbol (see t35 in the figure) is defined as the time T3.

Next, an example of variation in the “big hit” when the command shown in FIG. 117 (b) cannot be received will be described. In this example, it is assumed that the staging control unit 300 misses the fluctuation stop command (see t34 in the figure) due to the event that the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200. Further, the event that the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved until the timing of receiving the next fluctuation stop command (see t36 in the figure), and the staging control unit 300 stops the next fluctuation. The command shall be received.

Further, although not shown, the jackpot game is originally executed after the timing at which the staging control unit 300 receives the variable stop command and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The timing of receiving the next fluctuation stop command (see t36 in the figure) is the timing of receiving the fluctuation stop command in the symbol variation that is first started after the jackpot game.

In the example shown in FIG. 117 (b), when the effect control unit 300 receives the variation start command, the effect control unit 300 starts the variation of the decorative symbol (see t31 in the figure). Then, the effect control unit 300 executes the reach light emission effect (see t32 in the figure) at a predetermined timing, and then executes the jackpot light emission effect (see t33 in the figure).

Originally, the effect control unit 300 receives the fluctuation stop command and definitely stops the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (swinged). In this example, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200. Cannot be received The command cannot be received due to the occurrence of an event (see the cross mark in the figure). Therefore, the staging control unit 300 keeps the oscillating decorative symbol in a oscillating state without definitely stopping the oscillating decorative symbol. Then, the staging control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol upon receiving the next fluctuation stop command (see t36 in the figure).

Here, the time from the timing of executing the jackpot light emission effect (see t33 in the figure) to the timing of the fixed stop of the decorative symbol (see t36 in the figure) is defined as the time T4. This time T4 is longer than the time T3 (T4> T3) because it includes, for example, the time for executing the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the command is received as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. That is, the length relationship of each time is reversed depending on whether or not an event in which the command cannot be received normally occurs.

By the way, the effect of FIG. 117 executed by the effect control unit 300 described above can be grasped as follows. That is, the time T1 from the execution of the reach light emission effect to the reception of the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed is the time T1 from the execution of the jackpot light emission effect to the reception of the jackpot light emission effect. The time until the effect control unit 300 receives the executed fluctuation stop command is longer than T2, and the effect control unit issues the variation stop command of the variation in which the reach light emission effect is executed after the reach light emission effect is executed. The time T3 until the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command of the fluctuation stop command without receiving the 300 is the fluctuation stop command of the variation in which the jackpot light emission effect is executed after the jackpot light emission effect is executed. Is shorter than the time T4 until the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command of the variation stop command without receiving the effect control unit 300.

In addition, unlike the illustrated example, when the effect control unit 300 cannot receive the command due to the event that the command from the game control unit 200 cannot be received, for example, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (swinged) is hidden. Then, a mode of displaying an image notifying the error can also be adopted. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 117 (b) above, when the command cannot be received, the oscillating decorative symbol is continuously oscillated without stopping the oscillating decorative symbol. By executing the effect to be performed, the continuity with the effect that has been executed up to that point is guaranteed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Further, by keeping the decorative symbol swinging, the phenomenon that the staging control unit 300 cannot receive the command from the game control unit 200 is resolved, and when the fluctuation stop command is received, the staging control unit 300 swings. It is possible to perform a continuous production that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, such as fixing and stopping the decorative design.

Further, in the fluctuation of the "big hit" when the command shown in FIG. 117 (b) cannot be received, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed for a long time. As a result, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100 suppresses the player from feeling uncomfortable as compared with the mode in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is hidden and the image for notifying the error is displayed. It is possible to indicate to a clerk of a game store (pachinko hall) in which the game control unit 300 is installed that an event has occurred in which the effect control unit 300 cannot receive a command from the game control unit 200.

In each of FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b), the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the variation example of executing the reach light emitting effect and the big hit light emitting effect has been described. Not limited to this. For example, it may be a variable example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the reach light emitting effect and the chance eye light emitting effect are executed. This variation example can be grasped as follows. That is, the time T1 from the execution of the reach light emission effect to the reception of the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed is the chance eye light emission effect after the chance eye light emission effect is executed. The effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed after the reach light emission effect is executed, which is longer than the time until the effect control unit 300 receives the executed fluctuation stop command. The time T3 until the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command of the fluctuation stop command without doing so is the fluctuation stop command of the variation in which the chance eye light emission effect is executed after the chance eye light emission effect is executed. The time is shorter than the time until the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command of the variation stop command without receiving the effect control unit 300.

In addition, in each of FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b) above, the variation example of "out of reach" and the variation example of "big hit" have been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the above-mentioned effect may be executed over the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols. To further explain, for example, as a variation example in which the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order and the chance eye light emission effect is executed, and the lottery result of the next special symbol lottery is a big hit and the big hit light emission effect is executed. May be good. The relationship between this variation example and the variation example of "out of reach" described in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b) can be grasped as follows. That is, the time T1 from the execution of the reach light emission effect to the reception of the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed is the chance eye light emission effect after the chance eye light emission effect is executed. The effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the fluctuation in which the reach light emission effect is executed after the reach light emission effect is executed, which is longer than the time until the effect control unit 300 receives the executed fluctuation stop command. The time T3 until the effect control unit 300 receives the next variation stop command of the fluctuation stop command is the fluctuation stop command of the variation in which the chance eye light emission effect is executed after the chance eye light emission effect is executed. Is shorter than the time until the effect control unit 300 receives the variation stop command of the variation in which the next jackpot light emission effect of the variation stop command is executed without receiving the effect control unit 300.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the staging control unit 300 could not normally receive the fluctuation stop command, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the staging control unit 300 cannot normally receive a predetermined command (specific command), the above processing may be performed. Here, the specific command includes, for example, a fluctuation start command, an ending command, and the like.

Further, as described above, during the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol, the start operation effect using the decorative symbol 41, the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41, the stop operation effect using the decorative symbol 41, the increase display effect, and the shift effect. , Operation effect, extinction effect, variable icon TI or variable icon TI when the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or hold icon HI (hold image 52) when the effect control unit 300 does not normally receive a command is extinguished. Although the disappearance effect of the hold icon HI, the effect using the small symbol 56, and various other effects during the change of the special symbol have been described, the time of each effect may be as follows. For example, the time of the start motion effect using the decorative symbol 41 may be longer or shorter than the time of the stop motion effect using the decorative symbol 41, and the special game is performed during these times. It may be different depending on the degree of expectation. For example, when the jackpot expectation degree in the variation of the special symbol is relatively low, the start motion effect in the variation may be longer (or shorter) than the stop motion effect, or may be the same. Further, when the degree of expectation is relatively high, the stop operation effect may be longer (or shorter) than the start operation effect, or may be the same. Further, regardless of the degree of expectation, the time of the variable effect using the decorative symbol 41 may be longer than the respective times (and the sum of these times) of the start operation effect and the stop operation effect. Further, the time of the start operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the execution time of the shift effect. Further, the time of the stop operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the execution time of the shift effect. Further, the time of the motion effect at the start may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the motion in the motion effect. Further, the time of the motion effect at the time of stop may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the motion in the motion effect. Further, the time of the stop operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the extinction effect. Further, the time of the start operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the extinction effect. In addition, the time of the start operation effect is the icon TI or the hold icon when the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or the hold icon HI (hold image 52) when the command is not normally received is extinguished. It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance effect of HI.

Further, the time of the variation effect using the small symbol 56 (or the sub-first variation indicator 81) may be longer than the time of each of the start operation effect and the stop operation effect using the decorative symbol 41. Further, the time of the variation effect using the small symbol 56 (or the sub-first variation indicator 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start operation effect and the time of the stop operation effect. Further, the time of the variation effect using the small symbol 56 (or the sub first variation indicator 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start operation effect and the time of the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41. .. Further, the time of the variation effect using the small symbol 56 (or the sub-first variation indicator 81) may be longer than the sum of the time of the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41 and the time of the stop motion effect. ..

Further, when the effect using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position is the time of the start operation effect in the change. May be longer than. The time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position may be shorter or the same as the time of the operation effect at the start. Further, when the effect using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the change of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 in the change is used for the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position. It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the stop motion effect. When the effect using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position is the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the change. It may be shorter, longer, or the same. Further, when the effect using the movable accessory 115 is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position is from the execution time of the shift effect in the change. May be long, short, or the same. Further, the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the operation in the operation effect. Further, the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the extinction effect. Further, the time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory 115 to the return to the initial position is the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or the hold icon HI (hold image 52) when the command is not normally received. ) May be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance effect of the icon TI or the hold icon HI when disappearing.

Further, when the operation promotion image SSG (button operation image 67) prompting the operation of the effect button 161 is displayed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum effect period suggestion image suggesting the operation valid period of the effect button 161 is displayed. The time of may be longer than each time (and the sum of these times) of the start operation effect and the stop operation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the variation. Further, the maximum time for displaying the valid period suggestion image may be shorter than the time for the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the variation.

Further, when the operation promotion image SSG (button operation image 67) is displayed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum time for displaying the valid period suggestion image may be longer than the execution time of the shift effect. In addition, when the operation promotion image SSG is displayed while the special symbol is changing, the maximum time during which the validity period suggestion image is displayed is the extinction effect (normal extinction effect, when the command is not normally received). It may be longer than the extinction effect of the icon TI or the hold icon HI when the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or the hold icon HI (hold image 52) is extinguished.

Further, when the operation promotion image SSG (button operation image 67) is displayed and the effect using the movable accessory 115 is executed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum time during which the valid period suggestion image is displayed is the movable combination. The time from the start of operation of the object 115 to the return to the initial position may be shorter, longer, or the same. Further, when the effect image is displayed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the display time of the effect image may be shorter or longer than the start operation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the fluctuation. It may be the same. Further, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as each of the time of the stop operation effect and the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the variation. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed and the effect image indicating the chance eye is displayed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter than the stop operation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the fluctuation. It may be long, long, or the same. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start operation effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the fluctuation. .. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the display time of the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the variable display effect using the decorative symbol 41 in the variation.

Further, the time of the start operation effect using the decorative symbol 41 is longer than the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the time of the variation effect using the decorative symbol 41 is longer than the time of the one-cycle variation of the special symbol. Further, the time of the stop motion effect using the decorative symbol 41 is longer than the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, the execution time of the shift effect may be longer than the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the execution time of the increase display effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the execution time of the extinction effect in the normal time may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one-cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the execution time of the disappearance effect of the icon TI or the hold icon HI when the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or the hold icon HI (hold image 52) is extinguished when the command is not normally received is , It may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the execution time of the disappearance effect of the icon TI or the hold icon HI when the extra icon TI (variable image 51) or the hold icon HI (hold image 52) is extinguished when the command is not normally received is , It may be longer than the time of one unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. good. Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-second fluctuation display 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-second fluctuation display 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is performed, and a gaming machine in which the gaming state is changed via the jackpot game has been described. In another embodiment, even if it is not determined to be a big hit, the low-probability time-saving no-game state may be changed to the time-saving gaming state. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of consecutive times determined to be lost in the jackpot determination) in the low-probability time-saving no-game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 300 times), the fluctuation is determined to be a jackpot. Even if it is not, the player may shift to the time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, or 100 times or more). In this case, if the special symbol does not become a big hit by the time the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the time-saving game state ends and the game returns to the low-probability time-saving non-game state. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss (that is, even if the random number value for the special symbol lottery acquired at the time of winning the start port is a value indicating a loss), the special symbol acquired at the time of winning When the random number value for the lottery (big hit symbol random value) is a predetermined value, the player may shift to the time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times. Further, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the predetermined upper limit number of times may be variable or fixed. For example, when the predetermined upper limit number of times is variable, the time-saving gaming state is given when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the first number, and the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the second number. In some cases, a time-saving gaming state may be granted. In this case, the number of time reductions given may be different according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations, the larger the number of time reductions may be set. Further, in the case of shifting to the time saving game state based on the jackpot symbol random value, the number of time saving given by the acquired jackpot symbol random value may be different. For example, if the acquired jackpot symbol random value is the first value, the first time reduction number is given, and if the acquired jackpot symbol random value is the second value, the second time reduction number is given. May be done. Further, there may be a case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, or a case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value. In this case, the number of times of time saving to be given may be different depending on the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value. For example, when shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, it shifts to the time-saving gaming state of 50 times, and when shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value, it is more than that. It is possible to shift to a time-saving game state of a small number of 30 times. On the contrary, the number of time saving may be increased in the case of shifting to the time saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value than in the case of shifting to the time saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state without going through the jackpot in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is further granted without going through the jackpot during the shifted time-saving gaming state, it is new. The time-saving game state may be continued as many times as the time-saving number of times given to. For example, if 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the jackpot, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the big hit. You may shift to the time-saving game state of 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of time reductions may be added. For example, if 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the jackpot, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the big hit. In addition to the remaining 20 times, 50 times newly granted may be added, and 70 times of time saving game state may be given. Further, during such a time-saving game state that does not go through the big hit, the time-saving game state that does not go through the big hit may not be given. Further, in a configuration in which the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the jackpot symbol random value without going through the jackpot, a time-saving suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the above-mentioned upper limit number of times, the time saving suggestion effect may be easily executed. On the contrary, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the above-mentioned upper limit number of times, the time saving suggestion effect may be difficult to be performed. Further, in the start operation effect using the decorative symbol 41, a time saving suggestion effect may be performed. For example, if the decorative symbol 41 operates in a specific mode at the start of the fluctuation, it may suggest the possibility of shifting to the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variable display effect using the decorative symbol 41, a time saving suggestion effect may be performed. Further, in the stop operation effect using the decorative symbol 41, a time saving suggestion effect may be performed.

Although various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various embodiments and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of the embodiments and modifications to other staging and the like even if this document is not mentioned. .. In addition, it is possible to combine various embodiments and modifications with each other, or to replace some of them even if not mentioned in this document.

41 ... Decorative symbol, 100 ... Pachinko gaming machine, 114 ... Image display unit, 200 ... Game control unit, 231 ... Random number acquisition unit, 234 ... Special symbol determination unit, 300 ... Production control unit

Claims (1)

The main control means to control the progress of the game,
The effect control means for controlling the effect according to the command transmitted from the main control means is provided.
The main control means
Judgment means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition,
A storage means for storing determination information based on the determination as reserved storage, and
It has a variable display means for displaying a special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying it according to the result of the determination.
The staging control means
It is possible to additionally display the hold display according to the increase in the hold memory and to move and display the hold display according to the decrease in the hold memory.
Along with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol, it is possible to execute a variable effect in which the specific symbol is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed.
Along with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol, the special symbol is cycle-displayed in the first cycle and then stopped.
Upon receiving the specific command related to the variation effect, the movement display of the hold display can be started after the start of the cycle display of the special symbol.
After the start of the movement display, it is possible to display the hold display in the second cycle.
The time is different between the first cycle and the second cycle.
The hold display includes a first hold display and a second hold display that can be displayed after the display of the first hold display.
When the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed, the specific command related to the specific variation effect is received and the specific command related to the specific variation effect is not received. It is possible to make the mode of the movement display by the second hold display different from the case where the specific command related to the variation effect next to the variation effect is received .
The display area of the hold display includes a first display area in which the first hold display is displayed and a second display area in which the second hold display is displayed.
When the hold display is displayed in the first display area and the second display area, the specific command related to the next variation effect is received without receiving the specific command related to the variation effect. In this case, a gaming machine capable of hiding the hold display in the second display area and executing the movement display of the hold display in the first display area .

Images